FRENIC-G11S/P11S Instruction Manual INR-SI47-1206b-E

Instruction Manual

FRENIC 5000G11S/P11S

High-Performance, Low-Noise Inverter

General-Purpose Industrial Machines Fans and Pumps

230V Series 230V Series

1/4HP/FRNF25G11S-2UX 7.5HP/FRN007P11S-2UX to 125HP/FRN125G11S-2UX

460V Series to 150HP/FRN150P11S-2UX

460V Series

1/2HP/FRNF50G11S-4UX 7.5HP/FRN007P11S-4UX to 600HP/FRN600G11S-4UX to 800HP/FRN800P11S-4UX

！

CAUTION

Q

Read all operating instructions before installing, connecting (wiring), operating, servicing, or inspecting the inverter.

Q

Ensure that this instruction manual is

made available to the final user of the

inverter.

Q

Store this manual in a safe,

convenient location.

Q

The product is subject to change

without prior notice.

Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.

Fuji Electric Corp of America

INR-SI47-1206b-E

Preface

Thank you four purchasing our FRENIC5000G11S or FRENIC5000P11S series inverter. This product is used to drive a 3-phase electric motor at variable speed. As incorrect use of this product may result in personal injury and/or property damage, read all operating instructions before using.

As this manual does not cover the use of option cards, etc., refer to relevant manuals for option operations.

Safety Instructions

Read this manual carefully before installing, connecting (wiring), operating, servicing, or inspecting the inverter.

Familiarize yourself with all safety features before using the inverter.

In this manual, safety messages are classified as follows:

WARNING

Improper operation may result in serious personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Improper operation may result in slight to medium personal injury or property damage.

Situations more serious than those covered by CAUTION will depend on prevailing circumstances.

Always follow instructions.

Instructions on use

WARNING

• This inverter is designed to drive a 3-phase induction motor and is not suitable for a single-phase motor or others, as fire may result.

• This inverter may not be used (as is) as a component of a life-support system or other medical device directly affecting the personal welfare of the user.

• This inverter is manufactured under strict quality control standards. However, safety equipment must be installed if the failure of this device may result in personal injury and/or property damage.

There is a risk of accident.

Instructions on installation

WARNING

• Mount this inverter on an incombustible material such as metal.

There is a risk of fire.

• Do not place combustible or flammable material near this inverter, as fire may result.

CAUTION

• Do not hold or carry this inverter by the surface cover. Inverter may be dropped causing injury.

• Ensure that the inverter and heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter (lint, paper dust, small chips of wood or metal, and dust), as fire or accident may result.

• Do not install or operate a damaged inverter or an inverter with missing parts, as injury may result.

Instructions on wiring

WARNING

• Connect the inverter to power via a line-protection molded-case circuit breaker or Fuse,

as fire may result.

• Always connect a ground wire, as electric shock or fire may result.

• A licensed specialist must perform the wiring works, as electric shock may result.

• Turn off the power before starting the wiring work, as electric shock may result.

• Wire the inverter after installation is complete, as electric shock or injury may occur.

CAUTION

• Confirm that the phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply,

as injury may result.

• Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U,V,and W), as injury may result.

• Do not connect a braking resistor directly to the DC terminals (P(+)and N(-)), as fire may result.

• Ensure that the noise generated by the inverter, motor, or wiring does not adversely affect peripheral sensors and equipment, as accident may result.

Instructions on operation

WARNING

• Be sure to install the surface cover before turning on the power (closed). Do not remove the cover while power to the inverter is turned on.

Electric shock may occur.

• Do not operate switches with wet hands, as electric shock may result.

• When the retry function is selected, the inverter may restart automatically after tripping.

(Design the machine to ensure personal safety in the event of restart)

Accident may result.

• When the torque limiting function is selected, operating conditions may differ from preset conditions

(acceleration/deceleration time or speed). In this case, personal safety must be assured.


• As the STOP key is effective only when a function setting has been established, install an emergency switch independently, and when an operation via the external signal terminal is selected, the STOP key on the keypad panel will be disabled.


• As operations start suddenly if alarm is reset with a running signal input, confirm that no running signal is input before resetting alarm.


• Do not touch inverter terminals when energized even if inverter has stopped.

Electric shock may result.

CAUTION

• Do not start or stop the inverter using the main circuit power.

Failure may result.

• Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot.

Burns may result.

• As the inverter can set high speed operation easily, carefully check the performance of motor or machine before changing speed settings.

Injury may result.

• Do not use the inverter braking function for mechanical holding.


Instructions on maintenance, inspection, and replacement

WARNING

• Wait a minimum of five minutes (30HP or less) or ten minutes (40HP or more) after power has been tumed off (open) before starting inspection. (Also confirm that the charge lamp is off and that DC voltage between terminals P (+) and N (-) do not exceed 25V.)

Electrical shock may result.

• Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance, inspection, and replacement operations.(Take off metal jewelry such as watches and rings. Use insulated tools.)

Electric shock or injury may result.

Instructions on disposal

CAUTION

• Treat as industrial waste when disposing it.


Other instructions

WARNING

• Never modify the product.


Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe

CAUTION

• The contact capacity of alarm output for any fault (30A, B, C) and relay signal output (Y5A, Y5C) is 0.5A at

48V DC.

• The ground terminal G should be connected to the ground.

Use a crimp terminal to connect a cable to the main circuit terminal or inverter ground terminal.

• Where RCD (Residual-current protective device) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only RCD of type B is allowed on the supply side of this EE (Electric equipment).

Otherwise another protective measure shall be applied such as separation of the EE from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation of EE and supply system by the transformer.

• Use a single cable to connect the G inverter ground terminal. (Do not use two or more inverter ground terminals.)

• Use a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) that conform to EN or IEC standards.

• Use the inverter under over-voltage category III conditions and maintain Pollution degree 2 or better as specified in IEC664. To maintain Pollution degree 2 or more, install the inverter in the control panel (IP54 or higher level) having structure free from water, oil, carbon, dust, etc.

• For the input-output wiring of the inverter, use cable (diameter and type) as specified in Appendix C in

EN60204.

• To ensure safety, install an optional AC reactor, DC reactor, or external braking resistor as follows:

1) Install inside an IP4X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are exposed.

2) Install inside an IP2X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are not exposed.

• It is necessary to install the inverter in appropriate method using an appropriate RFI filter to conform to the

EMC directive. It is customer's responsibility to check whether the equipment, the inverter is installed in, conforms to EMC directive.


CAUTION

Table 1-1 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe

Fuse/MCCB current rating [A]

Tightening torque [N*m] Recommended wire size [mm

2

]

Inverter type

With

DCR

Without

DCR

G

L1/R, L2/S, L3/T

( G)

With

DCR

Without

DCR

1/4 FRNF25G11S-2UX

1/2 FRNF50G11S-2UX 5

1 FRN001G11S-2UX

2 FRN002G11S-2UX

3 FRN003G11S-2UX

10

5 FRN005G11S-2UX 20

7.5 FRN007P11S-2UX 30

7.5 FRN007G11S-2UX

10 FRN010P11S-2UX 40

10 FRN010G11S-2UX

5

15 FRN015P11S-2UX 50 100

15 FRN015G11S-2UX

20 FRN020P11S-2UX 75 125

20 FRN020G11S-2UX

25 FRN025P11S-2UX

25 FRN025G11S-2UX

100

150

30 FRN030P11S-2UX

30 FRN030G11S-2UX

175

10

15

15

30

40

60

40 FRN040P11S-2UX 150 200

40 FRN040G11S-2UX

50 FRN050P11S-2UX 175 250

50 FRN050G11S-2UX

60 FRN060P11S-2UX 200 300

60 FRN060G11S-2UX

75 FRN075P11S-2UX 250 350

75 FRN075G11S-2UX

100 FRN100P11S-2UX 350

100 FRN100G11S-2UX

125 FRN125P11S-2UX 400

125 FRN125G11S-2UX

150 FRN150P11S-2UX

500

-

1.2 -

2.5

(2.5)

1.8

3.5

5.8

13.5

27 13.5

48 27

1.2

2.5

(2.5)

-

2.5 2.5

0.7

4(4)

6(6) 10(10)

25

(16)

16

4

6

4

6

2.5

10

(10)

(16)

10

35

(16)

50

(16)

50

(25)

25×2

16 16

3.5

25 25

35

50

5.5

35

0.2

to

16×2

0.75

(25) (25)

4

16×2

(16)

35×2

(35)

25×2 25×2

70(35) 70 95

95

50×2 25×2 35×2

6

(50) (50) to

35×2 70×2 35×2 50×2

(35) (70)

6

50×2

(50)

50×2 70×2

10

185(95) 240 16

240

(120)

- 70×2 95×2

300 25

95×2

(95)

95×2 120×2

Note: The type of wire is 75℃ (167ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC).

The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature

50℃ (122ºF) or lower.


CAUTION

Table 1-2 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe

Fuse/MCCB current rating [A]

Tightening torque [N*m] Recommended wire size [mm

2

]

Inverter type

With

DCR

Without

DCR

G

L1/R, L2/S, L3/T

( G)

With

DCR

Without

DCR

1 FRN001G11S-4UX

2 FRN002G11S-4UX

3 FRN003G11S-4UX

5 FRN005G11S-4UX

5

10

10 15

7.5 FRN007P11S-4UX 15 20

7.5 FRN007G11S-4UX

10 FRN010P11S-4UX 20 30

10 FRN010G11S-4UX

1.8

3.5

15 FRN015P11S-4UX 30 40

15 FRN015G11S-4UX

20 FRN020P11S-4UX 50

20 FRN020G11S-4UX

40

25 FRN025P11S-4UX 60

25 FRN025G11S-4UX

5.8

30 FRN030P11S-4UX 50 75

30 FRN030G11S-4UX

40 FRN040P11S-4UX 75 100

40 FRN040G11S-4UX

50 FRN050P11S-4UX 125

50 FRN050G11S-4UX

100

60 FRN060P11S-4UX 150

60 FRN060G11S-4UX

13.5

75 FRN075P11S-4UX 125 175

75 FRN075G11S-4UX

100 FRN100P11S-4UX 175

100 FRN100G11S-4UX

125 FRN125P11S-4UX 200

125 FRN125G11S-4UX

150 FRN150P11S-4UX 225

150 FRN150G11S-4UX

200 FRN200P11S-4UX 300

200 FRN200G11S-4UX

250 FRN250P11S-4UX 350

250 FRN250G11S-4UX

300 FRN300P11S-4UX 400

300 FRN300G11S-4UX

350 FRN350P11S-4UX 500

350 FRN350G11S-4UX

400 FRN400P11S-4UX 600

400 FRN400G11S-4UX

450 FRN450P11S-4UX 700

450 FRN450G11S-4UX

500 FRN500P11S-4UX 800

500 FRN500G11S-4UX

600 FRN600P11S-4UX 1,000

600 FRN600G11S-4UX

700 FRN700P11S-4UX

-

27

48

13.5

27

1.2

0.7

2.5

(2.5)

6

(6)

10

(10)

16

(10)

25

(16)

35

(25)

50

(25)

25×2

(25)

70(35)

95

(50)

50×2

(50)

70×2

(70)

185(95)

240

(120)

120×2

(120)

185×2

(185)

240×2

(240)

185×3

(300)

2.5

(2.5)

6

(6)

10

(10)

2.5

4

6

16

(16)

25

(16)

35

(25)

50

(25)

10

25

35

25×2

(25)

50

35×2 25×2

(35)

-

35×2

-

2.5

2.5

2.5

4

6

10

25

35

2.5

50

25×2

35×2

95

35×2

95

50×2

50×2

70×2

70×2

240

95×2

2.5 to

6

95×2

240

120×2

120×2 150×2

150×2 185×2

240×2 240×2

185×3

150×3

300×2

185×3 240×3

240×3 300×3

4

6

10

16

25

50

70

800 FRN800P11S-4UX 1,200 300×3

Note: The type of wire is 75℃ (167ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC).

The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature

50℃ (122ºF) or lower.

240×3

(300)

0.2

to

0.75

Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark]

CAUTION

• [CAUTION] Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before working on this control.

• [CAUTION] Dangerous voltage exists until charge lights is off.

• [WARNING]

• More than one live parts inside the inverter.

• Type1 “INDOOR USE ONLY”

The inverter is approved as a part used inside a panel. Install it inside a panel.

• Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes.

• Use 60/75C copper wire only.

• A Class2 circuit wired with class1 wire.

• Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer.

• Connect the power supply to main power supply terminals via the Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) to apply the UL Listing Mark.

(See Instruction Manual basic connection diagram Fig.2-3-1).

• In case of using auxiliary control-power input (R0, T0), connect it referring to Basic connection diagram

Fig.2-3-1.

• Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model.

• Type 12 Enclosure at the back side only provided the mounting method is specifically defined, or equivalent for models with suffix as FRNxxP11S-2xxxA2, FRNxxG11S-2xxxA2, FRNxxP11S-4xxxA2,

FRNxxG11S-4xxxA2 or FRNxxP11S-2DCxxxA2, FRNxxG11S-2DCxxxA2, FRNxxP11S-4DCxxxA2,

FRNxxG11S-4DCxxxA2, FRNxxP11S-2DMxxxA2, FRNxxG11S-2DMxxxA2, FRNxxP11S-4DMxxxA2,

FRNxxG11S-4DMxxxA2.

• Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes.

General instructions

Although figures in this manual may show the inverter with covers and safety screens removed for explanation purposes, do not operate the device until all such covers and screens have been replaced.


CAUTION

Tightening torque and wire range

Voltage three- phase

230V/

Single-

Phase

230V three- phase

460V/

Single

Phase

460V

Inverter type

Required torque [lb-inch](N.m)

Wire range [AWG] (mm

2

)

G11S/P11S

Main terminal

Auxiliary control- power

Control

L1/R,L2/S,L3/T

U,V,W

Auxiliary control- power

Control

FRNF25G11S-2UX

FRNF50G11S-2UX

FRN001G11S-2UX

FRN002G11S-2UX

10.6(1.2)

―

16 (1.3)

―

FRN003G11S-2UX 14

FRN005G11S-2UX 10 (5.3)

FRN007G11S-2UX

FRN007,010P11S-2UX

FRN010G11S-2UX

FRN015P11S-2UX

FRN015G11S-2UX

FRN020P11S-2UX

FRN020G11S-2UX

FRN025P11S-2UX

FRN025G11S-2UX

FRN030P11S-2UX

FRN030G11S-2UX

FRN040G11S/P11S-2UX

FRN050P11S-2UX

FRN050G11S-2UX

31.0(3.5)

51.3(5.8)

119(13.5)

10.6(1.2)

6.2(0.7)

8 (8.4)

6 (13.3)

4 (21.2)

3 (26.7)

2 (33.6)

1 (42.4)

1/0 (53.5)

16(1.3)

24 (0.2)

239(27)

(85.0)

FRN075G11S/P11S-2UX 4/0

FRN100P11S-2UX

(107.2)

1/0X2 (53.5X2)

FRN100G11S-2UX 350(177)

FRN125P11S-2UX 2/0X2

FRN125G11S -2UX 500(253)

300X2 (152X2) FRN150P11S-2UX

FRNF50G11S-4UX

FRN001G11S-4UX

FRN002G11S-4UX

FRN003G11S-4UX

FRN005G11S-4UX

FRN007G11S-4UX

FRN007,010P11S-4UX

FRN010G11S-4UX

FRN015P11S-4UX

FRN015G11S-4UX

FRN020P11S-4UX

FRN020G11S-4UX

FRN025P11S-4UX

FRN025G11S-4UX

FRN030P11S-4UX

10.6(1.2)

15.9(1.8)

31.0(3.5)

―

16 (1.3)

14 (2.1)

12 (3.3)

10 (5.3)

8 (8.4)

6 (13.3)

―

FRN030G11S-4UX

FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX

119(13.5)

10.6(1.2)

6.2(0.7)

4 (21.2)

FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX 3

(33.6)

16(1.3)

24 (0.2)

(26.7)

FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX 2

FRN100P11S-4UX

FRN100G11S-4UX

1/0 (53.5)

239(27)

(67.4)

FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX 4/0

FRN200P11S-4UX

(107.2)

1X2 (42.4X2)

FRN200G11S-4UX 250 (127)

FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX 350(177)

FRN300P11S-4UX

FRN300G11S-4UX

FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX

425(48)

600(304)

FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX 300X2(152X2)

350X2(177X2)

FRN450P11S-4UX

FRN450G11S-4UX

FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX 500X2(253X2)

FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX 600X2(304X2)

FRN700P11S-4UX 500X3(253X3)

FRN800P11S-4UX 600X3(304X3)

Use the following power supply to the inverter

Inverter Model Maximum input voltage

FRNF25G11S-2UX ～ FRN125G11S-2UX

FRN007P11S-2UX ～ FRN150P11S-2UX

FRNF50G11S-4UX ～ FRN600G11S-4UX

FRN007P11S-4UX ～ FRN800P11S-4UX

AC240V (30HP or less)

AC230V (40HP or less)

AC480V

Input source current

Not more than 100,000A


CAUTION

When applying the single-phase to the three-phase drive, the applied motor must fulfill the table below and specifications other than table below are the same as those "Three-phase 230V ratings" and "Three-phase 460V ratings".

Single-phase 230V ratings

G11

P11

Items Specifications

Type

FRN[][][]G11S-2UX

Nominal applied motor [HP]

Rated output capacity (*1)

[kVA]

Rated output current (*2) [A]

Type

FRN[][][]P11S-2UX


Rated capacity (*1)

[kVA]


Phases, voltage, frequency

Voltage/frequency variations with

DCR w/o

DCR with

DCR w/o

DCR

F25 F50 001

1/8 1/4 1/2

0.3 0.6 1.0

1.0 1.7 2.8

Voltage: +10% to -10%, Frequency: +5% to -5%

1.2 2.0 3.5

1.8 3.1 5.3

002

1

1.6

4.6

Single-phase, 200 to 230V, 50/60Hz

6.6

9.5

003

1.5

2.3

6.6

9.5

005

3

3.9

11

007

- - - - - -

3

5.0

14

- - - - - -

- - - - - - 3

- - - - - - 4.6

- - - - - - 13

010

5

6.8

19

010

5

6.1

17

015

7.5

9.3

26

015

7.5

8.7

24.2

020

10

11

33

020

10

11

31

025

10

14

39

025

10

12

36

13.2 23.2 31.4 43.9 72.6 95.7 112

030

15

16

47

030

15

16

040 050 060 075

20 25 30 30

21 27 32 34

59.4 75 91 95

040

20

21

46.2 59.4

136

133 166

060

100

30

39

109

100

30 30 40 50

32 36 44 51

91 102 123 143

Single-phase, 200 to 220V/50Hz

Single-phase, 200 to 230V/60Hz

18.0 25.0 34.0 50.0 67.0 78.1 95.9 127 157 186 229

168 204 243 287

185

241

-

223

125

40

47

131

125

279

-

262

-

-

-

-

150

-

-

310

- - -

0.3 0.5 0.8

1.4

2.0

3.8

5.2

7.1

11 14 17 20 27 33 39 48 51 59 -

- - - - - - 5.2

7.1

11 14 17 20 27 39 47 55 65

Single-phase 460V ratings

Items Specifications

G11

Type

FRN[][][]G11S-4UX


Rated output capacity (*1) [kVA]


Type

FRN[][][]P11S-4UX

F50 001 002 003 005 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 -

1/4 1/2 1 1.5 3 3 5 7.5 10 10 15 20 25 30 30 40 50 60 60 75 100 100 125 150 150 200 -

0.7 1.1 1.8 2.3 4.4 6.7 9.5 11 14 18 20 26 33 39 47 48 57 68 82 97 118 133 162 184 206 236 -

0.9 1.5 2.3 3.0 5.6 8.5 12 15 18 23 26 33 42 49 59 61 72 86 103 122 149 167 204 231 259 297 -

-

- - - - - 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800

P11


- - - - - 3 5 7.5 10 10 15 20 25 30 30 30 40 50

Rated capacity (*1)

[kVA]


- - - - - 6.5 8.7 11

- - - - - 8.2 11 14

14

18

17

22

19

25

25

32

31

39

36

46

43 47 55 65

54 59 70 82


Voltage/frequency variations

Single-phase, 380 to 440V/50Hz *4)

Single-phase, 380 to 480V/60Hz with

DCR 1.0 1.8 3.5 4.7 8.5 13.0 18.0 25.0 33.3 39.6 47.5 63.1 76.9 91.9 110 113 137 164 192 234 286 319 395 446 512 575 w/o

DCR 1.7 3.1 5.9 8.2 13.0 19.3 24.8 38.3 50.3 59.9 69.3 86.0 104 124 145

- - - - with

DCR w/o

DCR

-

Single-phase,380 to 480V,50/60Hz

Voltage: +10% to -10%, Frequency: +5% to -5%

-

- - - 19.3 24.8 38.3 49.7 58.9 68.8 85.5 98.5 116 134 - - - - -

-

-

- - - - - 13.0 18.0 25.0 32.8 38.9 45.4 58.7 72.2 85.8 99.7 110 132 158 188 226 283 309 362 392 492 558 633 717

0.5 0.9 1.7 2.2 4.0 6.0 8.3 12 16 19 22 30 36 43 51 53 63 76 89 108 132 147 182 206 236 265 -

- - - - - 6.0 8.3 12 16 18 21 28 34 40 46 51 61 73

(*1) Indicated capacities are at the rated output voltage 230V for the three-phase 230V input, 230V for the single-phase 230V input and

460V for the three-phase / single-phase 460V input. The rated capacity will be lowered if the supply voltage is lowered.

(*2) In the case of a low impedance load, such as a high-frequency motor, the current may drop below the rated current.

(*3) Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.

(*4) The taps within the inverter must be changed for a power supply rated at 380 to 398V/50 Hz or 380 to 430V/60 Hz.

(*5) Indicates the values required when using a power-factor correcting DC reactor (DCR) (optional for inverters of 75HP or less) with a loaded nominal applied motor.

(*6) At single-phase input use, the output voltage may be lower than three-phase input.

Contents

1. Before Using This Product ····························1-1

1-1 Receiving Inspections ······························1-1

1-2 Appearance ·············································1-1

1-3 Handling the Product ·······························1-2

1-4 Carrying ···················································1-3

1-5 Storage ····················································1-3

2. Installation and Connection ···························2-1

2-1 Operating Environment ····························2-1

2-2 Installation Method ···································2-1

2-3 Connection ··············································2-3

2-3-1 Basic connection ·······························2-3

2-3-2 Connecting the main circuit and ground terminals ·····························2-8

2-3-3 Connecting the control terminals ······2-13

2-3-4 Terminal arrangement ······················2-16

2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit ·······························2-18

3. Operation ·······················································3-1

3-1 Inspection and Preparation before Operation ······································3-1

3-2 Operation Method ····································3-1

3-3 Trial Run ··················································3-1

4. Keypad Panel ················································4-1

4-1 Appearance of Keypad Panel ··················4-1

4-2 Keypad Panel Operation System

(LCD screen, Level Structure) ················4-2

4-2-1 Normal operation ······························4-2

4-2-2 Alarm occurrence ·····························4-2

4-3 Operating Keypad Panel ··························4-4

4-3-1 Operation Mode ································4-4

4-3-2 Setting digital frequency ····················4-4

4-3-3 Switching the LED monitor ···············4-5

4-3-4 Menu screen ·····································4-5

4-3-5 Setting function data ·························4-5

4-3-6 Checking function data ·····················4-7

4-3-7 Monitoring operating status ··············4-7

4-3-8 I/O check ··········································4-8

4-3-9 Maintenance information ··················4-9

4-3-10 Load rate measurement ···············4-10

4-3-11 Alarm information ·························4-11

4-3-12 Alarm history and factors················4-12

4-3-13 Data copy ······································4-13

4-3-14 Alarm mode ··································4-15

5. Function Select ············································· 5-1

5-1 Function select list ··································· 5-1

5-2 Function Explanation ······························· 5-7

6. Protective Operation ····································· 6-1

6-1 List of Protective Operations ··················· 6-1

6-2 Alarm Reset ············································ 6-2

7. Trouble shooting ··········································· 7-1

7-1 Protective function activation ·················· 7-1

7-2 Abnormal motor rotation ························· 7-5

8. Maintenance and Inspection ························· 8-1

8-1 Daily Inspection ······································· 8-1

8-2 Periodical Inspection ······························· 8-1

8-3 Measurement of Main Circuit

Electrical Quantity ···································· 8-4

8-4 Insulation Test ········································· 8-5

8-5 Parts Replacement ································· 8-5

8-6 Inquiries about Products and

Product Guarantee ································· 8-5

9. Specifications ················································ 9-1

9-1 Standard Specifications ·························· 9-1

9-2 Common Specifications ·························· 9-3

9-3 Outline Dimensions ································· 9-4

9-4 RS-485 Modbus RTU Serial

Communications ···································· 9-8

9-4-1 Transmission Specification ················ 9-8

9-4-2 Connection ········································· 9-8

9-4-3 Serial Interface Configuration ············ 9-8

9-4-4 Modbus RTU Functions ····················· 9-8

9-4-5 Inverter Function Code Access·········· 9-9

9-4-6 Command and Monitor

Data Registers·································· 9-9

9-4-7 Data Format Specification················ 9-11

9-4-8 Communication Errors ····················· 9-15

10. Options ······················································ 10-1

10-1 Built-in Options ···································· 10-1

10-2 Separately Installed Options ··············· 10-2

11. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ········ 11-1

11-1 General ··············································· 11-1

11-2 Recommended Installation

Instructions ········································· 11-2

11-3 The harmonics restriction

in Europe Union (EU) ························· 11-5

Appendix

App. Inverter Generating Loss ························A-1

2008-06 (K07/K07) 10CM

1. Before Using This Product

1-1 Receiving Inspections

Unpack and check the product as explained below.

If you have any questions about the product, contact the nearest Fuji sales office or your local distributor where you purchased the unit.

①

Check the ratings nameplate to confirm that the delivered product is the ordered one.

Ratings nameplate

TYPE : Inverter type

FRN 030 G11S-4 UX

Power supply voltage system

:2→ 230V grade、4→460V grade

Series name:G11S or P11S

Nominal applied motor:030→30HP

Product type: FRENIC5000

SOURCE : Power rating

OUTPUT : Output rating

MASS : Mass (not indicated for products with 30HP or less)

SER.No.

: Serial number

7 5 A 1 2 3 A 0 0 0 1 Z

Production lot serial number

Production month:1 to 9: January to September,

X: October, Y: November, Z: December

year:

② Check for damaged and/or missing parts upon delivery.

③

In addition to the inverter unit and this manual, the package contains rubber bushing (for products with 30HP or less) and a terminating resistor (1/2 W, 120Ω). The terminating resistors for products with 30HP or less is packed in a sack. The terminating resistors for products with 40HP or more is connected to the control terminal of the inverter unit. This terminating resistor is required for RS-485 communication. The terminating resistor need not be removed regardless of RS-485 communication status.

Use the “J2” connector on the control board to turn on or off the terminating resistor.

1-2 Appearance

Mounting screws of surface cover

Keypad panel

Surface cover

30HP or less

Mounting screws of surface cover

(6 screws total)

Keypad panel

Intermediate cover

Surface cover

Ratings nameplate

Ratings nameplate

40HP or more

1-1

Lifting holes

(4 holes total)

1-3 Handling the Product

(1) Removing the surface cover

For the inverter of 30HP or less, loosen the mounting screws of the surface cover, then remove the cover by pulling the top (see Figure 1.3.1).

Fig. 1-3-1 Removing the surface cover (for inverter of 30HP or less)

For the inverter of 40HP or more, remove the six mounting screws of the surface cover, then remove the surface cover.

Fig. 1-3-2 Removing the surface cover (for inverter of 40HP or more)

(2) Removing the keypad panel

After removing the surface cover as explained in (1), loosen the mounting screws of the keypad panel and remove as shown in Figure 1.3.3.

Fig. 1-3-3 Removing the keypad panel

Loosen the mounting screws of the keypad panel and remove using the finger holds on the keypad panel case.

Fig. 1-3-4 Removing the keypad panel (for inverter of 40HP or more)

1-2

1-4 Carrying

Carry the product by the main unit.

Do not carry the product while holding the cover or parts other than the main unit.

Use a crane or hoist to carry a product equipped with hanging holes.

1-5 Storage

Temporary storage

Temporary storage of this product must meet those conditions listed in Table 1-5-1.

Table 1-5-1 Storage environment

Item Specifications

Ambient temperature

-10℃(14ºF) to +50℃(122ºF)

Storage temperature

Relative humidity

Atmosphere

Air pressure

-25℃(-13ºF) to +65℃(149ºF)

5 to 95%

Pollution degree 2

Note2

Operation/storage: 86 to 106 kPa

Transport : 70 to 106 kPa

Condensation or freezing must not occur as a result of sudden temperature changes.

Note1: The storage temperature applies only to short periods such as transport.

Note2: As a large change in temperature within this humidity range may result in condensation or freezing, do not store where such temperature changes may occur.

①

Do not place this product directly on a floor.

②

To store the product in an extreme environment, pack in vinyl sheet, etc.

③ If the product is stored in a high-humidity environment, insert a drying agent (e.g., silica gel) and pack the product in vinyl sheet.

Long-term storage

If the product is to be stored for an extended period after purchase, the method of storage depends primarily on storage location.

The general long-term storage method is as follows:

①

The above conditions for temporary storage must be satisfied.

When the storage period exceeds three months, the upper limit of ambient temperature must be reduced to 30℃(86ºF) to prevent the deterioration of the electrolytic capacitors.

② Pack the product thoroughly to eliminate exposure to moisture and include a drying agent to ensure a relative humidity of about 70% or less.

③

If the product is mounted on a unit or control panel and is left unused and exposed to the elements like moisture or dust (particularly on a construction site), remove the product and store in a suitable environment.

④

Electrolytic capacitors not provided with power for an extended period will deteriorate. Do not store electrolytic capacitors for one year or longer without providing power.

1-3

2. Installation and Connection

2-1 Operating Environment

Install this product in a location that meets those conditions listed in Table 2-1-1

Table 2-1-1 Operating environment

Table 2-1-2 Output current reduction rate

Location Indoor

Ambient temperature

-10℃(14ºF) to +50℃(122ºF)(For products of

30HP or less, the ventilating covers must be removed if ambient temperature exceeds

+40℃(104ºF))

Relative humidity

5 to 95% (No condensation) current reduction rate

3300ft (1000m) or lower

3300-4950ft (1000 to 1500m)

4950-6600ft (1500 to 2000m)

6600-8250ft (2000 to 2500m)

8250-9900ft (2500 to 3000m)

1.00

0.97

0.95

0.91

0.88

Air pressure 86 to 106 kPa

Vibration

3mm:from 2 to less than 9 Hz, 1m/s less than 20 Hz, 1m/s

2

2

:from 9 to

:from 20 to less than 55

Hz, 1m/s

2

:from 55 to less than 200 Hz

3.9inch(100mm)

Right

2-2 Installation Method

①

Securely fasten the product in an upright position on a

30HP or less:

Gap X can be 0.

(side-by-side installation)

40HP or more:

Gap X >= 2inch (50mm) solid structure such that FRENIC5000G11S is facing the front.

Do not turn the product upside down or install in a horizontal position.

3.9inch(100mm)

Fig.2-2-1

② As heat is generated during inverter operation, the spaces shown in Fig. 2-2-1 are required to ensure sufficient cooling. As heat radiates upward, do not install the product beneath a device sensitive to heat.

③

As the heat sink may reach a temperature of 90℃(194ºF) during inverter operation, ensure that the material surrounding the product can withstand this temperature.

！

WARNING

Install this product on nonflammable material such as metal.

④ When installing this product in a control panel, consider ventilation to prevent ambient temperature of the inverter from exceeding the specified value. Do not install the product in an area from which heat cannot be sufficiently released.

⑤

If two or more inverters must be installed in the same device or control panel, arrange the units horizontally to minimize the effect of heat. If two or more inverters must be installed vertically, place an insulated plate between the inverters to minimize the effect of heat.

⑥ When shipped from the factory, inverters are internal cooling type inside panel. An inverter of 30HP or less can be converted to an external cooling type simply by adding an optional mounting adapter. An inverter of 40HP or more can be converted simply by moving mounting adapter.

Fig.2-2-2

In an external cooling system, a heat sink radiating about 70% of total inverter heat (total loss) can be placed outside the device or control panel.

Ensure that heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter (lint, Fig. 2-2-2 External cooling system moist dust particles etc.).

！

WARNING

･

In case of external cooling system, cover the inverter rear side in order not to touch the main capacitor and braking resistor. Electric shock may result.

･ Ensure that the inverter and heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter such as lint, paper dust, small chips of wood or metal, and dust.

Fire or accident may result.

2-1

An inverter of 40HP or more can be converted to an external cooling type simply by moving upper and lower mounting brackets as shown in Fig. 2-2-3. Remove the bracket screws, move the brackets, then secure the brackets using the case mounting screws. (The bracket screws are no longer required after changing the bracket mounting position.)

Quantity and size of mounting screws

Voltage series

Inverter type

FRN040G11S-2～FRN075G11S-2

230V

FRN040P11S-2～FRN100P11S-2

Bracket screws

Case mounting screws

5(M6×20) 5(M5×16)

460V









FRN400G11S-4～FRN450G11S-4 Note 3)

FRN500P11S-4～FRN600P11S-4 Note 3)

FRN500G11S-4～FRN600G11S-4 Note 3)

FRN700P11S-4～FRN800P11S-4 Note 3)

5(M6×20) 5(M5×16)

7(M6×20) 7(M5×16)

6(M8×20)

8(M8×20)

Note 1: Exchange the screws to M5 × 20 and secure the brackets with them.

Note 2: Secure the brackets using the bracket screws.

Note 3: The lower mounting brackets are not required to settle the inverter on the floor.

Bracket screws

Case mounting screws

－

Note 2)

Fig. 2-2-3

2-2

⑦

For inverters of 30HP or less, remove the ventilating covers if ambient temperature exceeds +40℃(104ºF)

(1) Removing the ventilating covers

One ventilating cover is mounted on top of the inverter and two or three are mounted at the bottom.

Remove the surface cover, then remove ventilating covers by popping out the cover inserts as shown in

Fig.2-2-4.

Fig. 2-2-4 Removing the ventilating cover

2-3 Connection

Remove the surface cover before connecting the terminal blocks as follows.

2-3-1 Basic connection

①

Always connect power to the L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T main circuit power terminals of the inverter.

Connecting power to another terminal will damage the inverter. Check that the power voltage is within the maximum allowable voltage marked on the nameplate, etc.

②

Always ground the ground terminal to prevent disasters such as fire or electric shock and to minimize noise.

③

Use a reliable crimp terminal for connection between a terminal and a cable.

④

After terminating the connection(wiring), confirm the following: a. Confirm that the connection is correct. b. Confirm that all necessary connections have been made. c. Confirm that there is no short-circuit or ground fault between terminals and cables.

⑤

Connection modification after power-on

The smoothing capacitor in the direct current portion of the main circuit cannot be discharged immediately after the power is turned off. To ensure safety, use a multimeter to check that the voltage of the direct current (DC) is lowered to the safety range (25V DC or less)after the charge lamp goes off. Also, confirm that the voltage is zero before short-circuiting. The residual voltage

(electric charge) may causesparks.

！

WARNING

• Always connect a ground wire.

Electric shock or fire may result.

• Ensure that a licensed specialist performs all wiring works.

• Confirm that the power is turned off (open) before commencing wiring operations.

Electrical shock may result.

2-3

Basic Connection Diagram (Sink Logic)

G11S:15HP and above

P11S:20HP and above

G11S:Up to 10HP

P11S:Up to 15HP

DB)

(CM)

(THR)

(*10)

Please refer to

9.1

Standard specifications for detail.

Ground-fault circuit interrupter

(GFCI)

0 to +/- 10V

0 to 10V

RS-485

Fig.2-3-1

Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated

(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.

(*2) Use as required.

(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.

(*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.

(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5)

(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) and N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.

Connect them as shown in the figure above.

(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.

(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.

(*9) If using V2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.

(*10) The P11S series inverter does not incorporate a DBR.

2-4

Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Sink Logic)



G11S:Up to 10HP

P11S:Up to 15HP

Please refer to

9.1



(GFCI)

0 to +/- 10V

0 to 10V

(*10)

RS-485

Fig.2-3-2

2-5

Basic Connection Diagram (Source Logic, Typically used in Europe)



G11S:Up to 10HP

P11S:Up to 15HP

Please refer to

9.1



(GFCI)

(*10)

0 to +/- 10V

0 to 10V

RS-485

Fig.2-3-3

Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated

(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.

(*2) Use as required.

(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.

(*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.

(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5)

(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) and N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.

Connect them as shown in the figure above.

(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.

(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.

(*9) If using V2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.

(*10) The P11S series inverter does not incorporate a DBR.

2-6

Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Source logic, Typically used in Europe)



G11S:Up to 10HP

P11S:Up to 15HP

(*10)

(THR)

(P24)

Please refer to

9.1



(GFCI)

0 to +/- 10V

0 to 10V

RS-485

Fig.2-3-4

2-7

2-3-2 Connecting the main circuit and ground terminals

Table 2-3-1 Functions of main circuit terminals and ground terminals

Description

L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main circuit power terminal Connects a 3-phase power supply.

U, V, W

R0, T0

Inverter output terminal

Auxiliary control-power input terminal

Connects a 3-phase motor.

Connects a backup AC power supply to the control circuit. (Not supported for inverter of 1HP or less)

P1, P (+)

DC reactor connecting terminal

P (+), DB

P (+), N (-)

G

External braking resistor connecting terminal

DC link circuit terminal

Inverter ground terminal

Connects the optional power-factor correcting DC reactor.

Connects the optional external braking resistor.

(For models of 10HP or less for G11S, 15HP or less for P11S)

Supplies DC link circuit voltage to the external braking unit (option) or power regeneration unit

(option).

Grounds the inverter chassis (case) to the earth.

(1) Main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T)

① Connect these terminals to the power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker or a ground-fault circuit interrupter for circuit (wiring) protection. Phase-sequence matching is unnecessary.

②

To ensure safety, a magnetic contactor should be connected to disconnect the inverter from the power supply when the inverter protective function activates.

③

Use control circuit terminal FWD/REV or the RUN/STOP key on the keypad panel to start or stop the inverter. The main circuit power should be used to start or stop the inverter only if absolutely necessary and then should not be used more than once every hour.

④

If you need to connect these terminals to a single-phase power supply, please contact the factory.

(2) Inverter output terminals (U, V, W)

①

Connect these terminals to a 3-phase motor in the correct phase sequence. If the direction of motor rotation is incorrect, exchange any two of the U, V, and W phases.

②

Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter output.

③ If the cable from the inverter to the motor is very long, a high-frequency current may be generated by stray capacitance between the cables and result in an overcurrent trip of the inverter, an increase in leakage current, or a reduction in current indication precision.

When a motor is driven by a PWM-type drive, the motor terminals may be subject to surge voltage generated by drive element switching. If the motor cable (with 460V series motors, in particular) is particularly long, surge voltage will deteriorate motor insulation. To prevent this, use the following guidelines:

Inverters 7.5 HP and larger

Motor Insulation Level

460 VAC Input Voltage


1000V

66 ft (20 m)

1312 ft (400 m) *

1300V

328 ft (100 m)

1312 ft (400 m) *

1600V

1312 ft (400 m) *

1312 ft (400 m) *

Inverters 5 HP and smaller

Motor Insulation Level



1000V

66 ft (20 m)

328 ft (100 m) *

1300V

165 ft (50 m) *

328 ft (100 m) *

1600V

165 ft (50 m) *

328 ft (100 m) *

* For this case the cable length is determined by secondary effects and not voltage spiking.

Note: When a motor protective thermal O/L relay is inserted between the inverter and the motor, the thermal

O/L relay may malfunction (particularly in the 460V series), even when the cable length is 165 feet (50m) or less. To correct, insert a filter or reduce the carrier frequency. (Use function code “F26 Motor sound”.)

2-8

(3) Auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0)

The inverter operates even if power is not provided to these terminals.

If a protective circuit operates and the magnetic contactor on the inverter power side is opened (off), the inverter control circuit power, the alarm output (30A, B, and C), and the keypad panel display goes off. To prevent this, the same AC power as the main circuit

AC power must be supplied (as auxiliary control power) to the auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0).

①

To ensure effective noise reduction when using a radio noise filter, the output power from the filter must go to the auxiliary control-power input terminals.

Power supply RCD

Noise filter

Insulation Transformer

Magnetic contactor

L1/R

L2/S

L3/T

R0

T0

Inverter

P1

+

P(+)

+

DC/DC

Inverter control power

Fig. 2-3-5 Connecting the auxiliary control-power input terminals

If these terminals are connected to the input side of the filter, the noise reduction effect deteriorates.

②

When the RCD (Residual-current Protective Device) is installed (G11S:30HP or less), the terminal R0 and

T0 should be connected to the OUTPUT side of the RCD. If they are connected to the input side of the

RCD, RCD will be malfunction because the power supply of the inverter is three phase and the terminal R0 and T0 is single phase.

When the terminal R0 and T0 are connected to the INPUT side of the

RCD, the insulation transformer is required to install as shown on the

Fig. 2-3-5.

(4) DC reactor connecting terminals (P1 and P (+))

① Before connecting a power-factor correcting DC reactor (optional) to these terminals, remove the factory-installed jumper.

②

If a DC reactor is not used, do not remove the jumper.

Note:For inverter of 100HP or more, the DC reactor is provided as a separate standard component and should always be connected to the terminals.

Fig. 2-3-6

(5) External braking-resistor connecting terminals (P (+) and DB)

For the G11S of 10HP or less, a built-in braking resistor is connected to terminals P (+) and DB. For the P11S of 15HP or less, no built-in braking resister is connected, however built-in braking transistor is equipped. If this braking resistor does not provide sufficient thermal capacity (e.g., in highly repetitive operation or heavy inertia load operation) or braking torque is not enough, an external braking resistor (option) must be mounted to improve braking performance.

①

In case of G11S, remove the built-in braking resistor

DC reactor

External braking resistor (DB) from terminals P(+) and DB. Insulate the resistor-removed terminals with adhesive insulation tape, etc.

② Connect terminals P(+) and DB of the external braking resistor to terminals P(+) and DB of the inverter.

③

The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not exceed 16ft (5m).

(DCR)

P1 P(+)

P

[ x x ]

DB

2

1

DB N(-)

(THR)

(P24)

DBR

Fig. 2-3-7 Connection (G11S:10HP or less)

2-9

(6) DC link circuit terminals (P (+) and N (-))

The models of 15HP or above for G11S, 20HP or above for P11S does not contain a drive circuit for the braking resistor. To improve braking performance, an external braking unit (option) and an external

External braking resistor (DB) braking resistor (option) must be installed.

①

Connect terminals P(+) and N(-) of the braking unit to terminals P(+) and N(-) of the inverter. The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not exceed 16ft(5m).

②

Connect terminals P(+) and DB of the braking resistor to terminals P(+) and DB of the braking unit.

The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not exceed 33ft (10m). When terminals P (+) and N (-) of the inverter are not used, leave terminals open.

If P (+) is connected to N (-) or the braking resistor is connected directly, the resistor will break.

③ Auxiliary contacts 1 and 2 of the braking unit have polarity. To connect the power regeneration unit, refer to the "Power Regeneration Unit Instruction Manual".

DC reactor

(DCR)

P1

P

P

P

P(+)

DB

DB

N

N(-)

2

1

2

(THR)

1

(P24)

Braking unit (BU)

Fig. 2-3-8 Connection (G11S:10HP or above, P11S:15HP or above)

(7) Inverter ground terminal

To ensure safety and noise reduction, always ground the inverter ground terminal. Also, metal frames of electrical equipment must be grounded as specified in the Electric Facility Technical Standard.

The connection procedure is as follows:

①

Ground metal frames to a ground terminal (Ground resistance:10Ω or less).

②

Use a suitable cable (short and thick) to connect the inverter system to the ground terminal.

(8) Auxiliary power switching connector (CN UX) (for inverter of 40HP or more)

When an inverter of 40HP or more requires a main circuit power voltage as listed in Table 2-3-2, disconnect auxiliary power switching connector CN UX from U1 and connect to U2. For the switching method, see Fig.

2-3-11.

Table 2-3-2 Main circuit power voltage requiring auxiliary power switching connector switching

Frequency [Hz]

50

60

Power voltage range [VAC]

380-398

380-430

！

CAUTION

•

Check that the number of phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply.

•

Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).


•

Do not connect a braking resistor directly to the DC terminals (P[+] and N[-]).

Fire may result.

(9) Fan power switching connector (CN RXTX) (for inverter of 40HP or more)

G11S/P11S without options supports DC power input via DC common connection by connecting the power regeneration converter (RHC series) as shown in Fig. 2-3-10.

For details, refer to technical documentation.

The inverter of 40HP or more contains an AC-powered component (e.g., AC cooling fan).

To use the inverter using DC power input, switch the fan power switching connector (CN RTXT) inside the inverter to the R0-T0 side and provide AC power to the R0 and T0 terminals. (See Fig. 2-3-9.)

For the switching method, see Fig. 2-3-11.

Note:

In the standard state, the fan power switching connector (CN RXTX) is connected to the L1/R-L3/T side.

When DC power input is not used, do not switch this connector.

The same AC voltage as the main circuit power voltage must be supplied to the auxiliary control-power input terminals

(R0 and T0). If not supplied, the fan does not rotate and the inverter will overheat (0H1).

2-10

30kW or more

MCCB

Noise filter

Magnetic contactor

L1/R

L2/S

L3/T

Jumper (not supplied for inverter of 100HP or more)

Inverter

P1

P(+)

N(-)

F

+ C

U

V

W

M

Power supply

CN RX TX

Fan

CN RX TX

R0

T0

R0

T0

When switched to DC power input mode

Fig. 2-3-9 Fan power switching

PWM converter

P(+)

Power supply

R

S

T

+

C

N(-)

Inverter

P1 P(+) N(-)

F

L1/R

L2/S

L3/T

+

C

U

V

W

M

CN RX TX Fan

Switch CNRXTX to the R0-T0 side.

R0

T0

Fig. 2-3-10A Example of connection by combination with power regeneration converter(40HP or more)

Note:

To connect the power regeneration converter to an inverter of 30HP or less, do not connect the power supply directly to the auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0) of the inverter. However, if such a connection is required, insulate these input terminals from the main power of the power regeneration converter with an insulation transformer. The connection example of a power regeneration unit is provided in the "Power Regeneration

Unit Instruction Manual".

MCCB or RCD

Noise filter

Magnetic contactor

RHC series FRN-G11S

Power supply

L1/R

L2/S

L3/T

L1/R

L3/T

U

V

W

M

R1

S1

T1

R0

T0

Insulation Transformer

Fig. 2-3-10B Example of connection by combination with power regeneration converter (30HP or less)

2-11

The switching connectors are mounted on the power

PCB above the control PCB as shown on the right.

Note:

To remove a connector, unlock the connector (using the locking mechanism) and pull. To mount a connector, push the connector until it click locks.

FRN040 to 075G11S-2UX, FRN040 to 150G11S-4UX,

FRN040 to 100P11S-2UX, FRN040 to 200P11S-4UX

<Enlarged view of part A>

FRN100 to 125G11S-2UX, FRN200 to 600G11S-4UX,

FRN125 to 150P11S-2UX, FRN250 to 800P11S-4UX

When shipped from the factory, CN UX is connected to the U1 side and CN RXTX is connected to the L1/R-L3/T side.

<Oblique view of part A>

Factory shipment status Connector removal After connector switching.

In this figure the power voltage is 380 to 398V AC, 50Hz (or 380 to

430V AC, 60Hz) and the inverter is used in DC power input mode.

Fig. 2-3-11 Power switching connectors (only for 40HP or more)

2-12

2-3-3 Connecting the control terminals

Table 2-3-3 lists the functions of the control circuit terminals. A control circuit terminal should be connected according to the setting of its functions.

Table 2-3-3

Classification

Terminal symbol

Terminal name Function

Analog input

Digital input

13 Potentiometer supply

Used for +10V DC power supply for frequency setting POT (variable resistor of 1 to 5kΩ)

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

V2

X6

X7

X8

X9

Voltage input

① Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage supplied from an external circuit.

- 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100%

- Reversible operation using positive and negative signals:0 to +/-

10V DC/0 to 100%

- Reverse operation: +10 to 0V DC/0 to 100%

②

The feedback signal for PID control is input.

③

The analog input value from the external circuit is used for torque control. (P11S does not support this function.)

* Input resistance: 22kΩ

Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage supplied from an external circuit

- 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100%

- Reverse operation:+10 to 0V DC/0 to 100%

* It can be used only one terminal "V2" or "C1" alternatively

* Input resistance:22kΩ

① Frequency is set according to the analog input current supplied from an external circuit.

- 4 to 20mA DC/0 to 100%

- Reverse operation:20 to 4mA DC/0 to 100%

②

The feedback signal for PID control is input.

③ PTC thermistor input

* It can be used only one terminal "V2" or "C1" alternatively.

* Input resistance:250Ω

11 Analog input common Common terminal for analog input signals operation/stop command

Used for forward operation (when FWD-CM is on) or deceleration and stop (when FWD-CM is off) operation/stop command

Used for reverse operation (when REV-CM is on) or deceleration and stop (when REV-CM is off)

Digital input 1

Digital input 2

Digital input 3

Digital input 4

Digital input 5

Digital input 6

Digital input 7

Digital input 8

Digital input 9

The coast-to-stop command, external alarm, alarm reset, multistep frequency selection, and other functions (from an external circuit) can be assigned to terminals X1 to X9. For details, see "Setting the Terminal

Functions E01 to E09" in Section 5.2, "Details of Each Function."

<Specifications of digital input circuit>

*

Operating voltage

Item min.

ON level 0V - 2V

OFF level

Operating current at ON level

Allowable leakage current at OFF level

22V

-

-

24V 27V

3.2mA

4.5mA

- 0.5mA

Analog output

CM

P24

PLC

FMA

(11:

Common terminal)

Common terminal Common terminal for Digital input and FMP terminals

Control Unit power Supply +24VDC power supply for control input. Maximum output current 100mA

PLC signal power

Analog monitor

Used to connect power supply for PLC output signals (rated voltage

24(22 to 27) V DC) at source logic operation.

Outputs monitor signal using analog DC voltage 0 to +10V DC.

The meaning of this signal is one of the following:

-Output frequency (before slip compensation) -Power consumption

-Output frequency (after slip compensation) -PID feedback value

-Output current -PG feedback value

-Output voltage -DC link circuit voltage

-Output torque -Universal AO

-Load factor

*Connectable impedance:5kΩ minimum

2-13

Pulse output

FMP

(CM:

Common terminal)

Frequency monitor

(pulse waveform output)

Outputs a monitor signal using the pulse waveform.

This signal has the same function as the FMA signal.

Transistor output

A running signal, frequency equivalence signal, overload early warning signal, and other signals from the inverter are output (as transistor output) to arbitrary ports, For details, see "Setting the Terminal

Functions E20 to E23" in Section 5.2, "Details of Each Function."

<Specifications of transistor output circuit>

*

Operating voltage

ON level

OFF level

Maximum load current at ON level

Leakage current at OFF level

-

-

-

-

2V

24V

-

-

3V

27V

50mA

0.1mA

Relay output

Communication

CMY Transistor common

30A,30B,

30C

Alarm output for any fault

Common terminal for transistor output signals

This terminal is insulated from terminals [CM] and [11].

If the inverter is stopped by an alarm (protective function), the alarm signal is output from the relay contact output terminal (1SPDT).

Contact rating: 48V DC, 0.5A

An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal operation) can be selected.

Y5A,Y5C Multipurpose-signal output

DX+, DX- RS-485 communication input-output

These signals can be output similar to the Y1 to Y4 signals above.

The contact rating for any fault is the same as that of the alarm output above.

An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal operation) can be selected.

Input-output signal terminals for RS-485 communication. UP to 31 inverters can be connected using the daisy chain method. shield connection terminal electrically floating.

(1)Analog input terminals (13,12,V2,C1,and 11)

①

These terminals receive weak analog signals that may be affected by external noise. The cables must be as short as possible (66ft (20m) or less), must be shielded, and must be grounded in principle. If the cables are affected by external induction noise, the shielding effect may be improved by connecting the shield to terminal [11].

②

If contacts must be connected to these circuits, twin

(bifurcated type) contacts for handling weak signals must be used. A contact must not be connected to terminal

[11].

0k to 5 kΩ

③ If an external analog signal output device is connected to these terminals, it may malfunction as a result of inverter noise. To prevent malfunction, connect a ferrite core or capacitor to the external analog signal output device.

Fig. 2-3-12

Fig. 2-3-13 Example of noise prevention

2-14

(2) Digital input terminals (FWD, REV, X1 to X9 and CM)

① Digital input terminals (e.g., FWD, REV, X1 to X9) are generally turned on or off by connecting or disconnecting the line to or from the CM terminal. If

Digital input terminals are turned on or off by switching the open collector output of PLC using an external power supply, a resulting bypass circuit may cause the inverter to malfunction.

To prevent a malfunction, connect the PLC terminal as shown in Fig. 2-3-14.

②

When using a contact input, a relay having highly

Programmable

Logic controller reliable contact must be used.

Fig. 2-3-14

Connection for External power supply

(3) Transistor output terminals (Y1 to Y4, CMY)

①

To connect a control relay, connect a surge absorbing diode to both ends of its exciting coil.

(4) Others

①

To prevent a malfunction as a result of noise, control terminal cables must be placed as far as possible from the main circuit cables.

②

The control cables inside the inverter must be secured to prevent direct contact with live section (e.g., main-circuit terminal block) of the main circuit.

！

！

WARNING

CAUTION

Control lines generally do not have enhanced insulation. If the insulation of a control line is damaged, the control signals may be exposed to high voltage in the main circuit. The Low Voltage Directive in Europe also restricts the exposure to high voltage.

Electric shock may result

The inverter, motor, and cables generate noise.

Check that the ambient sensors and devices do not malfunction.


(5) Wiring of control circuit (inverter of 40HP or more)

①

Pull out the control circuit wiring along the left panel as shown in Fig. 2-3-15.

② Secure the cable to cable binding hole A (on the left wall of the main circuit terminal block) using a cable-tie

(e.g., insulock). The cable-tie must not exceed 0.14inch (3.5mm) in width and 0.06inch (1.5mm) in thickness.

③ When the optional PC board is mounted, the signal lines must be secured to cable binding hole B.

Fig. 2-3-15 The wiring route of the control circuit

2-15

Fig. 2-3-16 The securing positions of the control-circuit line of inverter

(40HP or more)

2-3-4 Terminal arrangement

(1) Main circuit terminals

FRNF25 to 001G11S-2UX

FRNF50 to 001G11S-4UX Screw size M3.5

FRN100G11S-2UX /FRN125P11S-2UX

R0 T0

Screw size M4

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-) U V W

G

G

Screw size M3.5

Max. lug width 0.29inch (7.4mm)

FRN002 to 005G11S-2UX

FRN002 to 005G11S-4UX

R0 T0

Screw size M3.5

L1/R L2/S L3/T

G

DB P1 P(+) N(-) U V

Screw size M4

W

G


FRN007 to 010G11S-2UX /FRN007 to 015P11S-2UX


R0 T0

Screw size M3.5

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-) U V W

G

Screw size M5


G



R0 T0

Screw size M3.5

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-) U V W

G

G

Screw size M6


FRN040G11S-2UX /FRN040 to 050P11S-2UX


Screw size M4

R0 T0

U V W

L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-)

G G

Screw size M8

Max. lug width 1.18inch (30mm)



Screw size M4

R0 T0

U V W

L1/R L2/S L3/T P1

G

G

P(+) N(-)

Screw size G : M8 other terminals : M10


2-16

L1/R

G

L2/S L3/T P1

G

P(+) N(-) U V

Screw size G: M10 other terminals : M12


FRN125G11S-2UX /FRN150P11S-2UX


R0 T0

L1/R L2/S L3/T

P1

U

P(+)

V

N(-)

W

G G

Screw size G : M10 other terminals : M12


FRN400, 450 G11S-4UX/FRN500, 600 P11S-4UX

R0 T0

Screw size M4

L1/R L2/S

L3/T P1

U V W

L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 U V W

P(+) P(+) N(-) N(-)

W

Screw size G = M10

Other terminals = M12


FRN500, 600 G11S-4UX/FRN700, 800 P11S-4UX

R0 T0

L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-) U

V W

L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-) U V W

G G

Screw size R0, T0 = M4 G = M10

Other terminals = M12


(2) Control circuit terminals

30C

30A

30B

Y5A

Y5C

CMY

Y4

Y3

Y2

Y1

11

C1

12

FMA

13

FMP

V2

PLC

CM

X1

CM

X2

FWD

X3

REV

X4

P24

X5

P24

DX −

DX +

SD

X6

X7

X8

X9

2-17

2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit

Voltage

Inverter type

G11S/P11S

MCCB or

RCD/GFCI

Rated current(A)

W/

DCR

W/o

DCR

FRNF50G11S-2UX 5

FRN001G11S-2UX 5

Required torque [lb-inch](N.m)

Main terminal

5

10.6(1.2)

15

20

FRN005G11S-2UX 20

15.9(1.8)

30

Auxiliary control-power Control

FRN007G11S-2UX

FRN007,010P11S-2UX

30 50

FRN010G11S-2UX

FRN015P11S-2UX

30,40 50,75

40 75

50 100

3-phase

230V

FRN015G11S-2UX

FRN020P11S-2UX

FRN020G11S-2UX

FRN025P11S-2UX

50 100

75 125

75 125

100 150

FRN025G11S-2UX

FRN030P11S-2UX

100 150

100 175

175

119(13.5)

FRN050P11S-2UX

FRN050G11S-2UX

175 250

10.6(1.2)

6.2(0.7)

Wire range [AWG] (mm

2

)

L1/R,L2/S,L3/T

U,V,W

10 (5.3)

8 (8.4)

6 (13.3)

4 (21.2)

3 (26.7)

2 (33.6)

1 (42.4)

Auxiliary control-power Control

16(1.3)

24 (0.2)

FRN060G11S/P11S-2UX 200 300

FRN075G11S/P11S-2UX 250 350

239(27)

FRN100P11S-2UX

FRN100G11S-2UX

350 -

1/0X2 (53.5X2)

350(177)

FRN125P11S-2UX 2/0X2

FRN125G11S -2UX 500(253)

300X2 (152X2)

5

FRN001G11S-4UX 5

FRN002G11S-4UX 5

FRN003G11S-4UX 5

FRN005G11S-4UX 10

15.9(1.8)

FRN007G11S-4UX

20

15 30

FRN007, 010P11S-4UX

15,20 30,40

- -

16 (1.3)

14 (2.1)

12 (3.3)

FRN010G11S-4UX

FRN015P11S-4UX

10 (5.3)

FRN015G11S-4UX

FRN020P11S-4UX

FRN020G11S-4UX

FRN025P11S-4UX

30 50

30 50

40 60

40 60

51.3(5.8)

8 (8.4)

3-phase

460V

FRN025G11S-4UX

FRN030P11S-4UX

40 75

50 100

100

FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX 75 125

FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX 100 125

FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX 100 150 119(13.5)

FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX 125 200

FRN100P11S-4UX

FRN100G11S-4UX

175 -

10.6(1.2)

6.2(0.7)

6 (13.3)

4 (21.2)

(26.7)

(33.6)

16(1.3)

24 (0.2)

FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX 200 -

FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX 250 -

239(27)

FRN200P11S-4UX

FRN200G11S-4UX

300 -

1X2 (42.4X2)

250 (127)

FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX 350 -

FRN300P11S-4UX

500 -

FRN300G11S-4UX

FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX 500 -

FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN450P11S-4UX

600 -

700 -

425(48)

350(177)

600(304)

300X2(152X2)

-

FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX 800 -

FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX 1,000 -

-

FRN800P11S-4UX 1,200

350X2(177X2)

500X2(253X2)

600X2(304X2)

500X3(253X3)

600X3(304X3)

Note:The type of wire is 70℃(149ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC).

The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature 50℃(122ºF) or lower.

2-18

CAUTION on Magnetic contactor selection (without DCR)

[without DCR]

The magnetic contactor should be selected from "Magnetic contactor models" shown in table 2-3-4 to prevent the welding the magnetic contactor when using the auxiliary power input (R0, T0) and the time between the magnetic contactor of the main circuit (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) is OFF and re-turning on is "T off main circuit re-turning on time" or the less shown in table 2-3-4.

[with DCR or other conditions]

When the inverter which is NOT described in the table 2-3-4 or using with DCR (power-factor correcting DC reactor), the magnetic contactor is selected from "2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit" in chapter 2.

Table 2-3-4 Re-turning on time

*1 T off

Voltage G11S

(the time from power OFF to re-turning on)

3-Phase

230V series

3-Phase

460V series

FRN002G11S-2UX

FRN003G11S-2UX

FRN005G11S-2UX

-

FRN007G11S-2UX FRN007P11S-2UX



FRN002G11S-4UX

FRN003G11S-4UX

FRN005G11S-4UX

-







54

76

108

77

112

77

27

38

54

43

57

77

112

134

154

Magnetic contactor without DCR

L1/R

P1 P(+)

Power supply

L2/S

L3/T

R0

T0

Inverter

Auxiliary power input supplied

Magnetic contactor ON OFF ON

*1 T off

2-19

3. Operation

3-1 Inspection and Preparation before Operation

Check the following before operation:

①

Check that the connection is correct.

In particular, check that the power supply is not connected to any of the U, V, and W output terminals and that the ground terminal is securely grounded.

②

Check for short-circuits and ground faults between the terminals and live sections.

③

Check for loose terminals, connectors, or screws.

④

Check that the motor is separated from mechanical equipment.

⑤ Turn off switches before turning power to ensure that the inverter will not start or operate abnormally at power-on.

⑥

Check the following after power-on: a. Check that no alarm message is displayed on the keypad panel (see Figure 3-1-2). b. Check that the fan inside the inverter is rotating. (For inverters with 2HP or more)

！

WARNING

Be sure to put on the surface cover before turning on the power (close).

Never remove the cover while the power is applied to the inverter.

To ensure safety, do not operate switches with wet hands.

Electric shock may result

Fig. 3-1-1 Inverter connection

Fig. 3-1-2

Display on keypad panel at power-on

3-2 Operation Method

There are various methods of operation. Select a method of operation according to operating purpose and specifications by referring to Section 4-2, "Operating the Keypad Panel," and Chapter 5, "Explanation of

Functions." Table 3-2-1 lists general operation methods

3-3 Trial Run

Upon confirming that inspection results are normal (see Section 3-1), proceed with a trial run. The initial operation mode (set at factory) is using the keypad panel.

①

Turn power on and confirm that frequency

②

③ display 0.00Hz is blinking on the LED monitor.

Set the frequency to about 5Hz using key.

To start the run, press key (for forward rotation) or key (for reverse rotation). To stop, press key.

Table 3-2-1 General operation methods

Operation command

Operation using keypad panel

Frequency setting

Keys on keypad panel

∧

∨

Operation command

FWD

REV

STOP

④

Check the following items : a. Is the rotating direction correct? b. Is the rotation smooth? (no buzzing or abnormal vibration)

Operation using external signal terminals

∧ ∨

Freq. Setting POT (VR), analog voltage, analog current

Contact input

(switch)

Terminals

FWD-CM and

REV-CM c. Is acceleration and deceleration smooth?

If no abnormality is detected, increase the frequency and check the above items again.

If the results of the trial run are normal, start a formal run.

Notes:

- If an error is detected in the inverter or motor, immediately stop the operation and attempt to determine the cause of error referring to Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting."

- As voltage is still applied to the main circuit terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and auxiliary control-power terminals (R0, T0) even when the output from the inverter is terminated, do not touch the terminals. The smoothing capacitor in the inverter is being charged after the power is turned off and it is not discharged immediately. Before touching an electric circuit, confirm that the charge lamp is off or a multimeter is indicating a low voltage at the terminals.

3-1

4. Keypad Panel

The keypad panel has various functions for specifying operations such as keypad operation (frequency setting, run/stop command), confirming and changing function data, confirming status, and copying.

Review the use of each function before commencing running.

The keypad panel can also be removed or inserted during running. However, if the keypad panel is removed during a keypad panel operation (e.g., run/stop, frequency setting), the inverter stops and outputs an alarm.

4-1 Appearance of Keypad Panel

Control keys (valid during keypad panel operation):

Used for inverter run and stop

Operation keys:

Used for screen switching, data change, frequency setting, etc.

LED monitor:

Four-digit 7-segment display

Used to display various items of monitored data such as setting frequency, output frequency and alarm code.

Auxiliary information indication for LED monitor:

Selected units or multiple of the monitored data (on the LED monitor) are displayed on the top line of the

LCD monitor. The symbol indicates selected units or multiple number. The symbol ▲ indicates there is an upper screen not currently displayed.

LCD monitor:

Used to display such various items of information as operation status and function data. An operation guide message, which can be scrolled, is displayed at the bottom of the LCD monitor.

This LCD monitor has a backlight feature which turns on when the control power is applied or any keypad key is pressed, and stays on approximately 5 minutes after the last key stroke.

Indication on LCD monitor:

Displays one of the following operation status:

FWD: Forward operation REV: Reverse operation

STOP: Stop

Displays the selected operation mode:

REM: Terminal block LOC: Keypad panel

COMM: Communication terminal

JOG: Jogging mode

The symbol ▼ indicates there is a lower screen not currently displayed.

RUN LED :

Indicates that an operation command was input by pressing the or

REV

key.

Operation key

PRG

FUNC

DATA

∧

,

∨

SHIFT

>>

RESET

STOP

+

∧

STOP

+

RESET

Table 4-1-1 Functions of operation keys

Main function

Used to switch the current screen to the menu screen or switch to the initial screen in the operation/trip mode.

Used to switch the LED monitor or to determine the entered frequency, function code, or data.

Used to change data, move the cursor up or down, or scroll the screen

Used to move the cursor horizontally at data change. When this key is pressed with the up or down key, the cursor moves to the next function block.

Used to cancel current input data and switch the displayed screen. If an alarm occurs, this key is used to reset the trip status (valid only when the alarm mode initial screen is displayed).

Used to switch normal operation mode to jogging operation mode or vice versa. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD monitor.

Switches operation mode (from keypad panel operation mode to terminal block operation mode or reverse). When these keys are operated, function F01 data is also switched from

0 to 1 or from 1 to 0. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD indicator.

4-1

4-2 Keypad Panel Operation System (LCD screen, Level Structure)

4-2-1 Normal operation

The keypad panel operation system (screen transition, level structure) is structured as follows:

60.00

Operation mode

PRG

60.00

Program menu

FUNC

DATA

60.00

FUNC

DATA

60.00

Supplementary screen

RESET RESET

Screen for each function

FUNC

DATA

RESET

PRG

4-2-2 Alarm occurrence

If an alarm is activated, operation is changed from normal keypad panel operation to an alarm mode operation.

The alarm mode screen appears and alarm information is displayed.

The program menu, function screens, and supplementary screens remain unchanged as during normal

60.00

Operation mode

Alarm is activated

Alarm

Alarm mode

Keypad panel operating system during normal operation

PRG

Alarm

Program menu

FUNC

DATA

RESET

Alarm


FUNC

DATA

FUNC

DATA

RESET

Alarm


PRG

4-2

No.

Table 4-2-1 Overview of contents displayed for each level

Level name Content

1

2

Operating mode

Program menu

This screen is for normal operation. Frequency setting by keypad panel and the

LED monitor switching are possible only when this screen is displayed.

Each function of the keypad panel is displayed in menu form and can be selected.

Selecting the desired function from the list and pressing displays the screen of the selected function. The following functions are available as keypad panel functions (menus).

No.

Menu name

1 DATA SET

2 DATA CHECK

3 OPR MNTR

4 I/O CHECK

5 MAINTENANC

6

LOAD FCTR

7 ALM INF

8 ALM CAUSE

9 DATA COPY

Outline

The code and name of the function are displayed.

Selecting a function displays a data setting screen for checking, or modifying data.

The code and name of the function are displayed. Select a function to display a screen for checking data. Modifying data is possible as described above by going to the data setting screen.

Can check various data on the operating status.

Can check the status of analog and digital input/output for the inverter and options as an I/O checker.

Can check inverter status, life expectancy , communication error status, and ROM version information as maintenance information.

Can measure maximum and average current and average breaking force in load rate measurement.

Can check the operating status and input/output status at the latest alarm occurrence.

Can check the latest alarm or simultaneously occurred alarms and alarm history. Selecting the alarm and pressing , displays the contents of alarm as troubleshooting.

FUNC

DATA

Places the function of one inverter in memory for copying to another inverter.

3

4



The function screen selected on the program menu appears, hence completing the function.

Functions not completed (e.g., modifying function data, displaying alarm factors) on individual function screens are displayed on the supplementary screen.

4-3

4-3 Operating Keypad Panel

4-3-1 Operation Mode

The screen for normal inverter operation includes a screen for displaying inverter operating status and an operation guide and a screen for graphically displaying the operating status in the form of a bar graph. Switching between both screens is possible using the E45 function.

1) Operation guide (E45=0)

60.00

60.00

Rotating direction (no operation command, blank, yes: FWD/REV)

STOP

PRG

⇒ PRG

MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

2) Bar graph (E45=1)

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒ PRG

MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

Operating status (no operation command, STOP, yes: RUN)

60.00

Hz

A

%

Fout/Iout/TRQ

4-3-2 Setting digital frequency

Output frequency (maximum frequency at full-scale)

Output current (200% of inverter rating at full-scale)

Torque calculation value (200% of motor rating at full-scale) increases or decreases the speed of increment or decrement. The digit to change data can be selected

>>

If keypad panel settings are not selected, the present frequency setting mode appears on the LCD.

When selecting the PID function, PID command can be set with a process value. (Refer to technical documentation for details).

1)

Digital (keypad panel) settings (F01=0 or C30=0)

60.00

60.00 56.89

Frequency setting value

RUN

PRG

⇒ PRG

MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

∧ ∨

<DIG.SET Hz>

LOCAL

50 − 400

F/D

⇒DATA SET

∧ ∨

<DIG.SET Hz>

LOCAL

50

− 400

F/D

⇒DATA SET

Screen explanation

Present frequency setting mode

Frequency setting range

Operations guide

STORING.

..

2) Other than digital setting

60.00

RUN

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

∧ ∨

60.00

<REMOTE REF>

12+V1

F/D

⇒DATA SET


Screen explanation

Present frequency setting mode

Operation guide

4-4

4-3-3 Switching the LED monitor

When power is turned on, the monitor contents set by the function (E43) are displayed on the LED.

E43

When stopping

(E44 = 0) (E44 = 1)

When running

(E44 =0,1)

Unit Remarks

Hz

2

3

Setting frequency

Output current

(specified value)

Output voltage (specified value)

5 Synchronous speed setting value

Synchronous speed

Line speed 6 Line speed setting value rotation speed setting value calculation value

Load rotation speed

Torque calculation value

9 Power consumption

10 PID setting value

Setting frequency

Output current

Power consumption

PID setting value

11 PID remote setting value

PID remote setting value

PID feedback value value

A

V r/min. m/min. r/min.

% kW

−

−

−

For 4 digits or more, the last digits are cut, with x10, x100 marked on the indicator.

± indication

Displayed only when PID is effective in PID operation selection.

4-3-4 Menu screen

The “Program menu” screen is shown below. Only four items can be displayed simultaneously. Move the

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

⇒5.MAINTENANC

6.LOAD FCTR

7.ALM INF

8.ALM CAUSE

9.DATA COPY

4-3-5 Setting function data

Display

4.I/O CHECK

⇒5.MAINTENANC

6.LOAD FCTR

7.ALM INF

On the “program menu” screen, select "1. Data Setting" then the “Function Select” screen appears with function codes and names on it. Select the desired function.

60.00

RUN

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

60.00

⇒1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

FUNC

DATA

60.00

F00 DATA PRTC

F01FREQ COM 1

F02 OPR METHOD

F03 MAX Hz-1

FUNC

DATA

60.00

F01 FREQ COM 1

0

0 − 11

Function code Function name Data setting range Data

4-5

The function code consists of alphanumeric characters. Unique alphabetical letters are assigned for each function group.

Table 4-3-1

Function code

F00 - F42

E01 - E47

C01 - C33

P01 - P09

H03 - H39

A01 - A18

U01 - U61 o01 - o55

Function

Fundamental Functions

Extension Terminal Functions

Control Functions of Frequency

Motor Parameters

High Performance Functions

Alternative Motor Parameters

User Functions

Optional Functions

Remarks

Can be selected only with an option connected

To scroll “Function Select” screen rapidly , use + or + to move the screen in a unit grouped by alphabet.

>>

∧

>>

∨

∨

>>

+

∨

>>

+

∧

F00DATA PRTC

F01 FREQ CMD 1

F02 OPR METHOD

F03 MAX Hz-1

F00 DATA PRTC

F01FREQ CMD 1

F02

F03

PPR METHOD

MAX Hz-1

F42

E01X1 FUNC

E02

E03

TRQVECTOR1

X2 FUNC

X3 FUNC

A18

F02

SLIP COMP2

F00DATA PRT C

F01 DATA PRTC

OPR METHOD

On the “data setting” screen, the data values on the LCD can be increased or decreased in the smallest possible unit by pressing or Holding down or expands the rate of change, thereby enabling values to be modified more rapidly. Otherwise, select the digit to be modified using

, then set data directly. When data is modified, the value before modification will be displayed at the same time for returns to the “Function Select” screen. The modified data will be effective in inverter operation after the setting is disabled in the case of “Data protected” or “Data setting invalid during inverter running,” make necessary changes. Data cannot be modified for the following reasons :

Table 4-3-2

Display

LINK ACTIVE

NO SIGNAL(WE)

DATA PRTCTD

INV RUNNING

FWD/REV ON

Reason for no modification Release method

Currently writing from RS-485/link option to Function is being made.

The edit enabling command function is selected using a general-purpose input terminal.

Send a cancel command of function writing from RS-485. Stops a

“Write” operation from the link.

Among functions E01 to E09, turn the terminal of data 19 (edit enabling command selection) ON.

Data protection is selected for function

F00.

An attempt is made to change a function that cannot be changed during inverter operation.

An attempt is made to change a function that cannot be changed with the FWD/REV command on.

Change function F00 to 0.

Stop inverter operation.

Turn FWD/REV command off.

4-6

4-3-6 Checking function data

On the "Program menu" screen, select "2. DATA CHECK". The "Function Select" screen then appears with function codes and names.

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

⇒2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

FUNC

DATA

60.00

F00 0

F01 *1

F02 *1

F03 60Hz

FUNC

DATA

60.00

F00 DATA PRTC

0

0 - 1

Function code Data changed from initial value Data

Select the desired function and press to check the function data. By pressing , the screen switches to the "Data setting" screen, to modify data.

FUNC

DATA

4-3-7 Monitoring operating status

On the "Program menu" screen, select "3. OPR MNTR" to display the present operating status of inverter.

Use and to switch between the four operation monitor screens.

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

60.00

SYN=xxxxxx

LOD=xxxxxx

LIN=xxxxxx

60.00

SV=xxxxx

PV=xxxxx

TLD= xxx%

TLB= xxx%

∨

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

⇒3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

Synchronous rotation speed (r/min)

Load speed (r/min)

Line speed (m/min.)

PID setting value

PID feedback value

FUNC

DATA

∨

Fout=xxxx.xHz

Iout= x.xxA

Vout= xxxV

TRQ= xxx%

Driving torque limiting setting value

Braking torque limiting setting

60.00

∨

60.00

Fref=xxxx.xHz xxx xx xx xx

Output frequency

Output current

Output voltage

Torque calculation method

Setting frequency

Operation status

FWD/REV: Rotating direction

IL: Current limiting

VL: Voltage limiting

LU: Under voltage

TL: Torque limiting

4-7

4-3-8 I/O check

On the “Program menu” screen, select "4. I/O Check" to display analog and digital input/output signal status for the inverter and options. Use ∧ and

∨

to switch between the eight screens of data.

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

60.00

□

Y1

□

Y5

□

Y2

□

Y3

□

Y4

60.00

12=

± xx.xV

22= xx.xV

32=

± xx.xV

V2= xx.xV

∨

60.00

A0 =

±xx.xV

CS= xx.xmA

DI = xxxxH

D0= xxH

∨

60.00

P1=

±xxxxx0p/s

Z1= 0p/s

P2=

±xxxxx0p/s

Z2= 0p/s

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

⇒4.I/O CHECK

Output terminal status

:Signal OFF, :Signal ON

Analog input signal

Terminal 12 input voltage


(AIO option)


(AIO option)

Terminal V2 input voltage option input status

Terminal AO output voltage

(AIO option)

Terminal CS output current

(AIO option)

Digital input voltage

(HEX indication)

Digital output voltage

(HEX indication)

PG/SY option input status

Master-side A/B phase frequency

Unused

Slave-side A/B phase frequency

Unused

FUNC

DATA

∨

∨

∨

REV

COMM

60.00

□ X2

■ FWD □X3

□

REV □X4

□ X1 □ X5

60.00

□

X2

□

FWD □X3

□ REV □X4

□

X1

□

X5

60.00

C1= xx.xmA

C2= xx.xmA

60.00

FMA=xx.xV

FMP=xx.xV

FMP=xxxxp/s

∨

∨

□ X6

□ X7

□

X8

□ X9

□

X6

□

X7

□ X8

□

X9

Input terminal status

(terminals)


Input terminal status

(via communication)


Analog input signal

Terminal C1 input current

Terminal C2 input current

(AIO option)

Output for meter

FMA output voltage

FMP output voltage

FMP output frequency

4-8

4-3-9 Maintenance information

On the "Program menu" screen, select "5. Maintenance" to display information necessary for maintenance and inspection. Use and

∨

to switch between the five screens of data.

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

60.00

TCAP=xxxxxh

(61000h)

TFAN=xxxxxh

(25000h)

∨

60.00

NRK=xxxxx

NRR=xxxxx

NRO=xxxxx

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

⇒5.MAINTENANC

Capacitor on PC board accumulation time

( ):Judgment level.

Cooling fan operating time

( ):Judgment level.

No. of communication errors:keypad panel

No. of communication errors:RS-485

No. of communication errors:option

FUNC

DATA

∨

∨

60.00

TIME=xxxxxh

E D C= xxxV

TMPI=xxxx℃

TMPF=xxxx℃

∨

60.00

Imax=x.xxA

CAP=xxx.x%

60.00

INV=Hxxxx

KEYPAD=Kxxxxx

OPTION=Pxxxxx

Cumulative operating time

DC link circuit voltage

Maximum temperature inside inverter

(Maximum value in hour units)

Maximum temperature of heat sink


Maximum current(A)


Main capacitor capacity

ROM version: inverter

(40HP or more: H xxxxx

30HP or less:S xxxxx)

ROM version: keypad panel

ROM version: option

4-9

4-3-10 Load rate measurement

On the "Program menu" screen, select "6. Load Rate Measurement". On the "Load rate measurement" screen, the maximum current, average current, and average breaking power during the set measuring time are measured and displayed.

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

60.00

T=150s

Imax=0.00A

Iave=0.00A

BPave= 0.0%

60.00

T=3600s

Imax=56.4A

Iave=23.5A

BPave= 10.4%

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

5.MAINTENANC

⇒6.LOAD FCTR

Displays the remaining measuring time, when reaches zero, ends the measurement.

FUNC

DATA

Start measuring

FUNC

DATA

Display returns to initial values.

Maximum current

Average current

Average breaking power

(Motor rated output/100%)

60.00

T=360s

Imax=0.00A

Iave=0.00A

BPave= 0.0%

60.00

T=600s

Imax=0.00A

Iave= 0.00A

BPave= 0.0%

Measuring time

Change measuring using

>>

Set measuring time

4-10

4-3-11 Alarm information

On the "Program menu" screen, select "7. Alarm Information". Various operating data when the latest alarm

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

TIME=xxxxxh

EDC= xxxV

TMPI=xxxx℃

TMPF=xxxx℃

REM

□ Y3

□

Y4

5=xxx

4=xxx

3=xxx

2=xxx

OC1

OC1

□

X2 □X6

□ FWD □X3 □X7

□

REV □X4 □X8

□ X1 □ X5 □X9

OC1

□ Y1 □ Y5

□

Y2

OC1

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

5.MAINTENANC

6.LOAD FCTR

⇒7.ALM INF

Cumulative operating hours at alarm occurrence

DC link circuit voltage at alarm occurrence

Temperature inside inverter at alarm occurrence

Heat sink temperature at alarm occurrence

∨

Input terminal status at alarm

occurrence (terminals)

□

:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON

Output terminal status

at alarm occurrence

□

:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON

∨

Previous alarm

Before previous alarm

Two times before previous

Multiple alarms

(Simultaneously occurring alarms)

Alarm code

FUNC

DATA

Up to four alarm codes can be displayed simultaneously.

∨

∨

∨

∨

∨

OC1

Fout=xxxx.xHz

Iout= x.xxA

Vout= xxxV

TRQ= xxx%

∨

OC1

Fref=xxxx.xHz xxx xx xx xx

OC1

NRK=xxxxx

NRR=xxxxx

NRO=xxxxx

OC1

COMM

□

X2 □X6

□

FWD □X3 □X7

□

REV □X4 □X8

□ X1 □ X5 □X9

OC1

0/1=xxx xxx

-1=xxx xxx

-2=xxx xxx

-3=xxx xxx

Code of latest alarm

(High speed blinking during alarm alarm mode only)

Output frequency at alarm occurrence

Output current at alarm occurrence

Output voltage at alarm occurrence

Torque calculation value at alarm occurrence

Setting frequency at alarm occurrence

Operating status at alarm occurrence

FWD/REV:Rotating direction limiting

VL :Voltage voltage

TL :Torque

No. of communication errors at alarm occurrence:keypad panel

No. of communication errors at alarm occurrence:RS-485

No. of communication errors at alarm occurrence:Options

Input terminal status at alarm

occurrence (communication)

□ :Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON

Latest alarm

No. of occurrences

Alarm history

No. of occurrences

Updated at alarm occurrence

If the cause of alarm is the same as the same as the previous one, only the number of occurrences is incremented.

4-11

4-3-12 Alarm history and factors

On the "Program menu" screen, select "8.Alarm Factors" to display the alarm history.

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

OC1 xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

5.MAINTENANC

6.LOAD FCTR

7.ALM INF

⇒8.ALM CAUSE

FUNC

DATA

60.00

0/1=xxx xxx

-1=xxx xxx

-2=xxx xxx

-3=xxx xxx

Alarm code of the selected alarm

Alarm occurrence factors of the selected alarm.

FUNC

DATA

60.00

5=xxx

4=xxx

3=xxx

2=xxx

0/1=xxx xxx

-1=xxx xxx

-2=xxx xxx

-3=xxx xxx

Latest alarm

Alarm history

Multiple alarms

(simultaneously occurring alarms)

Move the cursor using of the alarm occurred.

4-12

4-3-13 Data copy

On the "Program menu" screen, select "9. Data Copy" to display the data copy read screen. A copy operation is then performed in the following order;reading inverter function data, removing the keypad panel, attaching the keypad panel to another inverter, and writing the data to the inverter.

The "verify" feature also makes it possible to compare and check differences in the data stored in the keypad panel and the data stored in the inverter.

Read data Write data

When WRITE to the type of the inverter (capacity, voltage and series) is same as the inverter type in copy origin, all of the function will be written. When

60.00

RUN

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

Attach keypad panel,

Turn power ON.

PRG

60.00 the type of the inverter is different, the function except the following will be written. However, in both cases,

F00(Data protection), P02/A11(Motor capacity),

P04/A13 (Motor tuning), H03(Data initializing), H31(RS-485 address) and o26/AIO optional adjustment will NOT be written.

- The function which will NOT be copied when different inverter type

U codes cannot be copied in any case.

FUNC.

NAME FUNC.

NAME

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

5.MAINTENANC

6.LOAD FCTR

7.ALM INF

8.ALM CAUSE

⇒9.DATA COPY

FUNC

DATA

<DATA COPY>

DATA copy screen

RUN

7.ALM INF

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

5.MAINTENANC

6.LOAD FCTR

8.ALM CAUSE

⇒9.DATA COPY

F03

F04

F06

F09

F10

F11

Max. freq. 1

Base freq. 1

F26

E33

Motor sound

OL function

(Mode select) voltage E34

OL function

(Level)

Max. voltage 1 E35

OL function

(Timer)

Torque boost 1

Electronic thermal 1


(Select)

(Level)

E37

H15

All of

"P" code

OL2 function

(Level)

Auto-restart

(Holding DC voltage)

Motor 1

F12


(Thermal time

constant)

F13 Electronic thermal overload relay

All of

"A" code

Motor 2

In addition, when WRITE from inverter ROM No. is new one to old one, WRITE except F01(Freq. command 1) without ERROR display.

-----

FUNC

DATA

WRITE to the inverter with different capacity, voltage and series.

Inverter type of data stored by keypad panel

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

MEMORY ERROR

FUNC

DATA

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

READ

<DATA COPY>

-----

READ

QQQQ

Reading

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

∧

Data of inverter type

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

FUNC

DATA

COMPLETE

QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ

Read complete

Remove keypad panel

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

QQQQ

FUNC

DATA

Mode (write mode)

FUNC

DATA

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

MEMORY ERROR

QQQQ

Writing

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

COMPLETE

QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ

Write complete

4-13

Data check

(verify)

60.00

RUN

PRG

⇒PRG

MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

Error processing

1) Change disabled during operation

If a write operation is attempted during an inverter operation, or vice versa, the error message below will appear.

60.00

1.DATA SETTING

2.DATA CHECK

3.OPR MNTR

4.I/O CHECK

5.MAINTENANC

6.LOAD FCTR

7.ALM INF

8.ALM CAUSE

⇒9.DATA COPY

FUNC

DATA

<DATA COPY>

Inverter type of data

040HP-4 stored in the keypad

READ the write operation.

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

INV RUNNING

2) Memory error

If a write operation is attempted while data has not been saved (i.e., no data) in the keypad panel data memory during the read mode, the following error message will appear:

<DATA COPY>

WRITE

MEMORY ERROR

∧

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

3) Verify error

During a data check (verify) operation, if data stored in the keypad panel differs from data stored in the inverter, the following error message is displayed to indicate the function No. The data check is suspended.

To continue the data check and check for other mismatching data, press . To stop the data check

∧

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

<DATA COPY>

075HP-4

WRITE

ERR:F25

QQQQ

FUNC

DATA

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

VERIFY

QQQQ

Data check in progress

4) Data protection

When WRITE to the inverter which is protected by

"Data protection" function, the following error message will appear. After released the protection, write operation is attempted.

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

VERIFY

COMPLETE

QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ

Data check complete

<DATA COPY>

040HP-4

WRITE

DATA PRTCTD

4-14

4-3-14 Alarm mode

If an alarm occurs, the “Alarm screen” indicating the alarm contents is displayed. Use and to display alarm history and multiple alarms (if more than two alarms occur simultaneously).

∨

Alarm detection order

1.OC1

1=xxx xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

RESET

⇒RESET

Alarm code

No. of consecutive occurrences

Alarm name

Operation guide

Alarm detection order

Operation method

LED display

LCD display

Description

∧ ∨

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Blank

Blank

Blank

Blank

Alarm code: See Table 6-1-1

-1

-2

-3

5

4

3

2

1

0

No. 5 alarm

No. 4 alarm

No. 3 alarm

No. 2 alarm

No. 1 alarm (more than two alarms occurred)

Latest alarm (only one alarm occurred/alarm released)

Previous alarm history

Alarm history before previous alarm

Alarm history two times before previous alarm

4-15

5. Function select

5-1 Function select list

F:Fundamental Functions

Func

No.

NAME LCD Display Setting range Unit

Min.

Unit

Factory setting Change User

Set value

Remark

F01 Frequency command 1

F03 Maximum frequency 1

F07 Acceleration time 1

F08 Deceleration time 1

F09 Torque boost 1

F10 Electronic

F17 Gain

F26 Motor sound

F30 FMA

F31

F33 FMP

F36 30RY operation mode

F40 Torque limiter 1

F41

F42 Torque vector control 1

F00

DATA PRTC

F01

FREQ CMD 1

F02

OPR METHOD

F03

MAX Hz-1

F04

BASE Hz-1

F05

RATED V-1

(at Base frequency 1)

F06

MAX V-1

(at Maximum frequency 1)

F07

ACC TIME1

F08

DEC TIME1

F09

TRQ BOOST1

(Select) ELCTRN OL1

(Level) OL LEVEL1

F12 (Thermal time constant)

F12

TIME CNST1

F13 Electronic thermal overload relay

F13

DBR OL

(for braking resistor) mode

momentary power failure

F14

RESTART

(High) H LIMITER

(for freq. set signal)

(Carrier freq.)

F17

freq.)

(Freq.)

F25

F26

FREQ GAIN

F18

FREQ BIAS

DC BRK Hz

START Hz

STOP Hz

MTR SOUND

0, 1

0 to 11

0 to 4

-

-

-

G11S: 50 to 400Hz

P11S: 50 to 120Hz

G11S: 25 to 400Hz

P11S: 25 to 120Hz

0V: (Output voltage

proportinal to sorce voltage)

80 to 240V: (230V class)

320 to 480V: (460V class)

80 to 240V: (230V class)

320 to 480V: (460V class)

0.01 to 3600s

Hz

Hz

V

V s

1

1

1

1

0.01

60

60

230:(230V class)

460:(460V class)

230:(230V class)

460:(460V class)

6.0 20.0

0.0, 0.1 to 20.0 - 0.1

G11S:2.0

P11S:0.1

0, 1, 2 -

INV rated current 20 to 135% A 0.01

Motor rated current

0.0 to 200.0%

G11S: -400.0 to +400.0Hz

P11S: -120.0 to +120.0Hz

0.0 to 60.0Hz

P11S: 0 to 80%

0.1 to 30.0s

0.1 to 60.0Hz

Hz

% s

Hz s

Hz

0.1

1

0.1

100.0

0.0

0.0

0

NA

A

A

A

A

A

A

NA

NA

NA

0.5 to 75.0 min

G11S

[Up to 10[HP]]

P11S

0, 1, 2

[15[HP] and above ]

0

[Up to 15[HP]] min

-

0.1

-

5.0 10.0 A

1 A

0

[20[HP] and above ]

0

0

0

0 to 5 -

G11S: 0 to 400Hz Hz 1 70 A

0 A

%

Hz

0.1

0.1

A

A

0.1 to 60.0Hz

Nominal applied motor

Setting range

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.0

0.5

0.0

0.2

NA

NA

NA

75HP or less 0.75 to 15kHz

G11

100HP or more 0.75 to 10kHz kHz 1 2 A

30HP or less 0.75 to 15kHz

P11 40HP to 100HP 0.75 to 10kHz

(Voltage adjust)

F30

FMA V-ADJ

(Function)

F31

FMA FUNC

(Pulse rate)

F33

FMP PULSES

125HP or more 0.75 to 6kHz

0 to 200%

-

% 1 100

0 to 10 -

300 to 6000p/s (full scale) p/s 1 1440

A

F36

30RY MODE

(Driving)

F40

DRV TRQ 1

0, 1

% 1 0

-

-

G11S: 20 to 200%, 999

P11S: 20 to 150%, 999

% 1 999

A

A

A

(Braking)

F41

BRK TRQ 1 G11S: 0%, 20 to 200%, 999

P11S: 0%, 20 to 150%, 999

F42

TRQVECTOR1 0,

999 A

0

5-1

E:Extension Terminal Functions

Func

No.

E10 Acceleration time 2

E11 Deceleration time 2





E40 Display coefficient A

E41 Display coefficient B

E44

E46

E47

NAME

E24 Y5A, Y5C terminal func.

E25 Y5 RY operation mode

E32 signal

E33 OL1 function(Mode select)

E34 signal

LCD Display

E01

X1 FUNC

E02

X2 FUNC

E03

X3 FUNC

E04

X4 FUNC

E05

X5 FUNC

E06

X6 FUNC

E07

X7 FUNC

E08

X8 FUNC

E09

X9 FUNC

E10

ACC TIME2

E11

DEC TIME2

E12

ACC TIME3

E13

DEC TIME3

E14

ACC TIME4

E15

DEC TIME4

(Driving) DRV TRQ 2

E20

Y1 FUNC

E21

Y2 FUNC

E22

Y3 FUNC

E23

Y4 FUNC

E24

Y5 FUNC

E25

Y5RY MODE

(Hysteresis) FAR HYSTR

(Level) FDT1 LEVEL

(Hysteresis) FDT1 HYSTR

E33

OL1 WARNING

(Level)

E34

OL1 LEVEL

(Level) FDT2 LEVEL

(Display at STOP mode)

(Language)

(Contrast)

(Level)

E40

COEF A

E41

COEF B

E42

DISPLAY FL

(Function)

E44

(Function)

E46

E47

OL2 LEVEL

LED MNTR

LED MNTR2

LCD MNTR

LANGUAGE

CONTRAST

Setting range Unit

Min.

Unit

Factory setting Change User

Set value

Remark

0 to 35

0.01 to 3600s

-

1 NA

2 NA

3 NA

4 NA

5 NA

6 NA s 0.01

6.00

7 NA

8 NA

20.00 A

6.00 20.00 A

6.00 20.00 A

6.00 20.00 A

6.00 20.00 A

6.00 20.00 A

G11S: 20 to 200%, 999

P11S: 20 to 150%, 999

%

%

1

1

999

999

P11S: 0%, 20 to 150%, 999

0 to 37 -

A

A

0,1 -

0.0 to 10.0Hz Hz 0.1

2.5

G11S: 0 to 400Hz

P11S: 0 to 120Hz

0.0 to 30.0Hz

Hz

Hz

1

0.1

60

1.0

0: Thermal calculation

1: Output current

G11S: 5 to 200%

P11S: 5 to 150%

- s

-

A 0.01

0.1

1 NA

2 NA

7 NA

10 NA

0

Motor rated current

10.0

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

G11S: 0 to 400Hz

P11S: 0 to 120Hz

G11S: 5 to 200%

P11S: 5 to 150%

-999.00 to 999.00

-999.00 to 999.00

0.0 to 5.0s

Hz

A 0.01

-

- s

1

0.01

0.01

0.1

60

Motor rated current

0.01

0.00

0.5

0 to 12 -

0, 1 -

A

A

A

0, 1

0 to 5

0(soft) to 10(hard)

- -

- -

- -

0

1

5

A

A

A

C:Control Functions of Frequency

Func

No.

NAME

C09

C10

C11

C12

C13

C14

C15

C16

C01 Jump frequency

C02

C03

C04

C05 Multistep frequency

C06 setting

C07

C08

C17

C18

C19

LCD Display

(Jump freq. 1)

C01

JUMP Hz 1

(Jump freq. 2)

C02

JUMP Hz 2

(Jump freq. 3)

C03

JUMP Hz 3

(Hysteresis)

C04

JUMP HYSTR

(Freq. 1)

C05

MULTI Hz-1

(Freq. 2)

C06

MULTI Hz-2

(Freq. 3)

C07

MULTI Hz-3

(Freq. 4)

C08

MULTI Hz-4

(Freq. 5)

C09

MULTI Hz-5

(Freq. 6)

C10

MULTI Hz-6

(Freq. 7)

C11

MULTI Hz-7

(Freq. 8)

C12

MULTI Hz-8

(Freq. 9)

C13

MULTI Hz-9

(Freq. 10)

C14

MULTI Hz-10

(Freq. 11)

C15

MULTI Hz-11

(Freq. 12)

C16

MULTI Hz-12

(Freq. 13)

C17

MULTI Hz-13

(Freq. 14)

C18

MULTI Hz-14

(Freq. 15)

C19

MULTI Hz-15

Setting range

G11S: 0 to 400Hz

P11S： 0 to 120Hz

0 to 30Hz

G11S: 0.00 to 400.00Hz

P11S: 0.00 to 120.00Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Unit

Min.

Unit

Factory setting Change during op

User

Set value

-30HP 40HP-

1 0 A

0 A

0 A

1 3 A

0.01

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

0.00 A

Remark

5-2

Func

No. operation


Min.

Unit

Factory setting

C20

JOG Hz G11S:0.00 to 400.00Hz Hz

120.00Hz

0.01

5.00

C21

PATTERN 0,1,2 - s 0.01

0.00 F1

0.00 F1

0.00 F1

0.00 F1

0.00 F1

0.00 F1

0.00 F1

C30

FREQ CMD 2

C31

BIAS 12

C32

GAIN 12

C33

REF FILTER

-100.0 to +100.0%

0.0 to +200.0%

0.00 to 5.00s

%

%

0.1

0.1

s 0.01

0.0

100.0

0.05

Change

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

User

Set value

Remark

C30 Frequency command 2

C31 Bias(terminal[12])

C32 Gain(terminal[12])

C33 Analog setting signal filter

P:Motor Parameters

P01 Number of motor 1 poles

P03

P04

P05

P06

P09 Slip compensation control 1

P01

M1 POLES

(Capacity) M1-CAP

(Rated current)

(Tuning)

P03

P04

M1-Ir

M1 TUN1

2 to 14

Up to 30[HP]: 0.01 to 60HP

40[HP]and above: 0.01 to 800HP

0.00 to 2000A

0, 1, 2

(On-line Tuning)

P05

M1 TUN2 0, 1

(No-load current)

P06

2000A

-

HP

A

2

0.01

0.01

-

-

4

Motor Capacity

Motor rated current

0

0

VALUE

P09

SLIP COMP1 0.00 to 15.00Hz

% 0.01

% 0.01

Hz 0.01

Fuji STANDARD RATED

VALUE

Fuji STANDARD RATED

VALUE

0.00

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

A

A

A

H:High Performance Functions

H04 Auto-reset

H06 Fan stop operation

H08 Rev. phase sequence lock

H13 Auto-restart

H15

H16

H21

H30 Serial link

H28

DROOP

(Function select)

H30

LINK FUNC

H31 Modbus-RTU

H32

(Address)

H31

ADDRESS

(Mode select on no response error)

H32

MODE ON ER

H33

H34

H35

H36

H37

H38

H03

DATA INIT

(Times)

H04

AUTO-RESET

(Restart time)

H13

RESTART t

(Holding DC voltage)

(Mode select)

(Timer) rate) length) check) bits)

(No response error detection time)

H06

FAN STOP

(Mode select)

H07

ACC PTN

H08

REV LOCK

H09

START MODE

H10

ENERGY SAV 0, 1

H11

DEC MODE 0, 1

H12

INST CL

H15

H38

HOLD V

(OPR command selfhold time)

H16

SELFHOLD t

H18

TRQ CTRL

H19

AUT RED

(Mode select)

H20

PID MODE

(Feedback signal)

H21

FB SIGNAL

H26

PTC MODE

TIMER

BAUD RATE

PARITY

STOP BITS

NO RES t

0, 1

0, 1 to 10 times

0, 1

0,1,2,3

0, 1

0, 1, 2

0, 1

0.1 to 10.0s

3ph 230V class: 200 to 300V

3ph 460V class: 400 to 600V

0.0 to 30.0s, 999

G11S:0, 1, 2, P11S:0 (Fixed)

0, 1

0, 1, 2

0, 1, 2, 3

0, 1

G11S:-9.9 to 0.0Hz, P11S:0.0 (Fixed.)

0, 1, 2, 3

0 (broadcast), 1 to 247

0, 1, 2, 3

0.0 to 60.0s

0, 1, 2, 3

LENGTH 0

0, 1, 2

0(2bit), 1(1bit)

0 (No detection), 1 to 60s

H39

1.00s

-

- s

1

1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

0

0

5

0

0

0

0

-

-

- s

-

-

-

0.1

Hz/s 0.01

V 1 s 0.1

- -

-

- s

-

- s s

-

-

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

G11S:0

P11S:1

0

1

0.1 0.5

10.00

230V class:235V

460V class:470V

999

0

0

0

1

0.1

0.0

0.00

0.5

V 0.01

Hz

-

-

- s

-

-

-

- s

0.1

-

-

0.1

-

-

1

NA

A

A

A

NA

NA

NA

A

A

NA

NA

A

A

NA

A

A

A

A

NA

A

NA

NA

0 A

1.60 A

0.0

0

A

A

1

0

2.0

1

NA

A

A

A

0

0

0

0

0.01

A

A

A

A

A

5-3

A:Alternative Motor Parameters

Func

No.


Min.

Unit

Factory setting

A01 Maximum frequency 2

A06 Electronic

thermal

overload

relay

motor

A01

MAX Hz-2

A02

BASE Hz-2

A03

RATED V-2

(at Base frequency 2 )

A04

MAX V-2

(at Base frequency 2)

A05

TRQ BOOST2

(Select) ELCTRN OL2

G11S: 50 to 400Hz

P11S: 50 to 120Hz

G11S: 25 to 400Hz

P11S: 25 to 120Hz

0:

80 to 240V:(230V class)

320 to 480V:(460V class)

80 to 240V:(230V class)

320 to 480V:(460V class)

0.0, 0.1 to 20.0

0, 1, 2

Hz

Hz

1

1

60

60

460:(460V class)

V 1 230:(230V

V

-

1

-

230:(230V class)

460:(460V class)

G11S:2.0

P11S:0.1

- -

A08

A09 Torque vector control 2

A10 Number of motor-2 poles

A11 Motor 2

(Thermal time constant)

A08

TIME CNST2

(Capacity)

A11

M2-CAP

A09

A10

M2 POLES

0.5 to 75.0 min

TRQVECTOR2 0,

2 to 14 poles

Up to 30HP:0.01 to 60HP

A 0.01

min 0.1

- - ploes

HP

2

0.01

above:0.01to800HP

A 0.01

1

Motor rated current

5.0 10.0

0

4

Motor capacity

Motor rated current

A17 (%X

A18 (Slip compensation control 2)

A18

SLIP COMP2

0.00 to 50.00%

0.00 to 15.00Hz

- -

- -

0

0

A 0.01

Fuji standard rated value

% 0.01


% 0.01


Hz 0.01

0.00

Change User

Set value

NA

NA

NA

NA

A

A

A

A

NA

NA

NA

A

A

A

NA

NA

NA

NA

Remark

U:User Functions

U01

USER 01

during braking torque limit

U02 1st S-shape level at acceleration

U02

USER 02

U03 2nd S-shape level at acceleration

U04 1st S-shape level at deceleration

U05 2nd S-shape level at deceleration

U08 Main DC link capacitor

U09

U10 PC board capacitor powered on time

U11 Cooling fan operating time

U13 Magnetize current vibration damping gain

U15 Slip compensation filter time constant

U23 Integral gain of continuous operation

at power failure

U24 Proportional gain of continuous

operation at power failure

U48 Input phase loss protection

U03

USER 03

U04

USER 04

U05

USER 05

(Initial value)

U08

USER 08

(Measured value)

U09

USER 09

U10

U11

U13

U15

U23

USER 10

USER 11

USER 13

USER 15

USER 23

U24

USER 24

U48

USER 48

0 to 65535

1 to 50%

1 to 50%

1 to 50%

1 to 50%

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535h

0 to 65535h

0 to 32767

0 to 32767

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0, 1, 2 h

-

-

%

%

%

%

-

h

- 1

75 A

10 NA 1

1

1

10

10

NA

NA

1 10 NA

1 xxxx A

1 0 A

1 0 A

1 0 A

1 819 410 A

-

-

-

1 556 546 A

1

1738 1000 A

1

1024 1000 A

-

-75HP 100HP- NA

0 1

U49 RS-485 protocol selection

U56 Speed agreement

U57 /PG error

(Detection width)

(Detection timer)

U59 Braking-resistor function select(up to 30HP)

U60 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration

Manufacturer's function(40HP or more)

U61 Voltage detect offset and gain adjustment

U89 Motor overload memory

retention

U49

U56

U57

U58

USER 49

USER 56

USER 57

USER 58

0, 1

0 to 50%

0.0 to 10.0s

0, 1

00 to A8(HEX)

-

% s

-

-

1

0.1

-

1 NA

10

0.5

A

1 NA

U59

USER 59

1

00 NA

U60

USER 60

U89

USER 89

0, 1

0.1

-

0 NA

1 A

U61

USER 61 --30HP：0(Fixed.) 0

-

40HP--：0, 1, 2

-

-

5-4

Table 5-1-1 The factory setting value (details)

Inverter type

*2

Function code

*1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *1

F11:Electric thermal1(Level)

E34:OL1 function(Level)


A07:Electric thermal overload relay for motor2

(Level)

P02:Motor1

(Capacity)

A11:Motor2

(Capacity)

P03:Motor1

(Rated current)

A12:Motor2

(Rated current)

P06:Motor1

(No-load current)

P07:Motor1

(%R1 setting)

A15:Motor2

(No-load current)

A16:Motor2

(%R1 setting)

P08:Motor1

(%X setting)

A17:Motor2

(%X setting)

[A] [HP] [A] [A] [%] [%]

FRNF50G11S-2UX 2.00 1/2 2.00 1.22 6.15 8.80

FRN001G11S-2UX 3.00 1.00 3.00 1.54 3.96 8.86

FRN002G11S-2UX 5.80 2.00 5.80 2.80 4.29 7.74

FRN003G11S-2UX 7.90 3.00 7.90 3.57 3.15 20.81

FRN005G11S-2UX 12.6 5.00 12.6 4.78 3.34 23.57

FRN007G11S-2UX 18.6 7.50 18.6 6.23 2.65 28.91

FRN010G11S-2UX 25.3 10.00 25.3 8.75 2.43 30.78

FRN015G11S-2UX 37.3 15.00 37.3 12.7 2.07 29.13

FRN020G11S-2UX 49.1 20.00 49.1 9.20 2.09 29.53

FRN025G11S-2UX 60.0 25.00 60.0 16.7 1.75 31.49

FRN030G11S-2UX 72.4 30.00 72.4 19.8 1.90 32.55

FRN040G11S-2UX 91.0 40.00 91.0 13.6 1.82 25.32

FRN050G11S-2UX 115.0 50.00 115.0 18.7 1.92 24.87

FRN060G11S-2UX 137.0 60.00 137.0 20.8 1.29 26.99

FRN075G11S-2UX 174.0 75.00 174.0 28.6 1.37 27.09

FRN100G11S-2UX 226.0 100.00 226.0 37.4 1.08 23.80

FRN125G11S-2UX 268.0 125.00 268.0 29.8 1.05 22.90

FRN007P11S-2UX 18.6 7.50 18.6 6.23 2.65 28.91

FRN010P11S-2UX 25.3 10.00 25.3 8.75 2.43 30.78

FRN015P11S-2UX 37.3 15.00 37.3 12.7 2.07 29.13

FRN020P11S-2UX 49.1 20.00 49.1 9.20 2.09 29.53

FRN025P11S-2UX 60.0 25.00 60.0 16.7 1.75 31.49

FRN030P11S-2UX 72.4 30.00 72.4 19.8 1.90 32.55

FRN040P11S-2UX 91.0 40.00 91.0 13.6 1.82 25.32

FRN050P11S-2UX 115.0 50.00 115.0 18.7 1.92 24.87

FRN060P11S-2UX 137.0 60.00 137.0 20.8 1.29 26.99

FRN075P11S-2UX 174.0 75.00 174.0 28.6 1.37 27.09

FRN100P11S-2UX 226.0 100.00 226.0 37.4 1.08 23.80

FRN125P11S-2UX 268.0 125.00 268.0 29.8 1.05 22.90

FRN150P11S-2UX 337.0 150.00 337.0 90.4 0.96 21.61

5-5

Inverter type

Function code

*2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *1

F11:Electric thermal1(Level)

P02:Motor1

(Capacity)


A11:Motor2

(Capacity)


A07:Electric thermal overload relay for motor2

(Level)

P03:Motor1

(Rated current)

A12:Motor2

(Rated current)

P06:Motor1

(No-load current)

A15:Motor2

(No-load current)

P07:Motor1

(%R1 setting)

A16:Motor2

(%R1 setting)

P08:Motor1

(%X setting)

A17:Motor2

(%X setting)

[A] [HP] [A] [A] [%] [%]

FRNF50G11S-4UX 1.00 1/2 1.00 0.61 6.15 8.80

FRN001G11S-4UX 1.50 1.00 1.50 0.77 3.96 8.86

FRN002G11S-4UX 2.90 2.00 2.90 1.40 4.29 7.74

FRN003G11S-4UX 4.00 3.00 4.00 1.79 3.15 20.81

FRN005G11S-4UX 6.30 5.00 6.30 2.39 3.34 23.57

FRN007G11S-4UX 9.30 7.50 9.30 3.12 2.65 28.91

FRN010G11S-4UX 12.7 10.00 12.7 4.37 2.43 30.78

FRN015G11S-4UX 18.7 15.00 18.7 6.36 2.07 29.13

FRN020G11S-4UX 24.6 20.00 24.6 4.60 2.09 29.53

FRN025G11S-4UX 30.0 25.00 30.0 8.33 1.75 31.49

FRN030G11S-4UX 36.2 30.00 36.2 9.88 1.90 32.55

FRN040G11S-4UX 45.5 40.00 45.5 6.80 1.82 25.32

FRN050G11S-4UX 57.5 50.00 57.5 9.33 1.92 24.87

FRN060G11S-4UX 68.7 60.00 68.7 10.40 1.29 26.99

FRN075G11S-4UX 86.9 75.00 86.9 14.30 1.37 27.09

FRN100G11S-4UX 113.0 100.00 113.0 18.70 1.08 23.80

FRN125G11S-4UX 134.0 125.00 134.0 14.90 1.05 22.90

FRN150G11S-4UX 169.0 150.00 169.0 45.20 0.96 21.61

FRN200G11S-4UX 231.0 200.00 231.0 81.80 0.72 20.84

FRN250G11S-4UX 272.0 250.00 272.0 41.10 0.71 18.72

FRN300G11S-4UX 323.0 300.00 323.0 45.10 0.53 18.44

FRN350G11S-4UX 375.0 350.00 375.0 68.30 0.99 19.24

FRN400G11S-4UX 429.0 400.00 429.0 80.70 1.11 18.92

FRN450G11S-4UX 481.0 450.00 481.0 85.50 0.95 19.01

FRN500G11S-4UX 534.0 500.00 534.0 99.20 1.05 18.39

FRN600G11S-4UX 638.0 600.00 638.0 140.00 0.85 18.38

FRN007P11S-4UX 9.30 7.50 9.30 3.12 2.65 28.91

FRN010P11S-4UX 12.7 10.00 12.7 4.37 2.43 30.78

FRN015P11S-4UX 18.7 15.00 18.7 6.36 2.07 29.13

FRN020P11S-4UX 24.6 20.00 24.6 4.60 2.09 29.53

FRN025P11S-4UX 30.0 25.00 30.0 8.33 1.75 31.49

FRN030P11S-4UX 36.2 30.00 36.2 9.88 1.90 32.55

FRN040P11S-4UX 45.5 40.00 45.5 6.80 1.82 25.32

FRN050P11S-4UX 57.5 50.00 57.5 9.33 1.92 24.87

FRN060P11S-4UX 68.7 60.00 68.7 10.40 1.29 26.99

FRN075P11S-4UX 86.9 75.00 86.9 14.30 1.37 27.09

FRN100P11S-4UX 113.0 100.00 113.0 18.70 1.08 23.80

FRN125P11S-4UX 134.0 125.00 134.0 14.90 1.05 22.90

FRN150P11S-4UX 169.0 150.00 169.0 45.20 0.96 21.61

FRN200P11S-4UX 231.0 200.00 231.0 81.80 0.72 20.84

FRN250P11S-4UX 272.0 250.00 272.0 41.10 0.71 18.72

FRN300P11S-4UX 323.0 300.00 323.0 45.10 0.53 18.44

FRN350P11S-4UX 375.0 350.00 375.0 68.30 0.99 19.24

FRN400P11S-4UX 429.0 400.00 429.0 80.70 1.11 18.92

FRN450P11S-4UX 481.0 450.00 481.0 85.50 0.95 19.01

FRN500P11S-4UX 534.0 500.00 534.0 99.20 1.05 18.39

FRN600P11S-4UX 638.0 600.00 638.0 140.00 0.85 18.38

FRN700P11S-4UX 756.0 700.00 756.0 164.00 1.02 21.92 note 1) The factory setting described on *1 is the value of Fuji standard induction motor 460V/50Hz/4-poles.

The factory setting described on *1 is NOT changed automatically even function code P01/A10 (motor poles) is changed to excluding 4-poles. note 2) The minimum units of the data *2 is as follows.

Current value

[A]

Minimum units

[A]

0.01

100 to 999

1000 to 9990

0.1

1

10

5-6

5-2 Function Explanation

F00 Data protection

Ｆ：

Fundamental function

X Setting can be made so that a set value cannot be changed by keypad panel operation.

F 0 0 D A T A P R T C

Related functions

E01 to E09

(Set values 19)

Setting range 0 : The data can be changed.

[Setting procedure ]

1 : The data cannot be changed.

∧

Forward / Inverse operation


Maximum frequency

Set value:1,3

Forward operation

(set value: 1, 3, 4, 5)

Inverse operation

(set value::6) to change the value from 0 to 1, then press the

DATA

to validate the change.

∨ to change the value from 1 to 0, then press the

F01

X

Frequency command 1

This function selects the frequency setting method.

Related functions

E01 to E09

(Set values 17,18)

C30

F 0 1 F R E Q C M D 1

∧ ∨

1 : Setting by voltage input (terminal

[12 ](0 to +10V)

+ terminal [V2](0 to +10V) )

2: Setting by current input (terminal

[C1] (4 to 20mA)).

3: Setting by voltage input + current input (terminal

[12]

+ terminal

[C1] ) (-10 to +10V + 4 to 20mA).

4: Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal

[12]

(-10 to +10V))

5: Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal

[12]

+[V1](Option) (-10 to +10V))

6: Inverse mode operation

(terminal

[12] +[V2] (+10V to 0 ))

Related functions:

E01 to E09

(Set value 21)

7: Inverse mode operation

(terminal

[C1] (20 to 4mA))

8: Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 1

(initial value = 0) (terminals

[UP] and [DOWN])

9: Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 2

Related functions:

E01 to E09

(Set value 17,18)

(initial value =last final value)

(terminals

[UP] and [DOWN])

See the function explanation of E01 to E09 for details.

10: Setting by pattern operation

Related functions:

C21to C28

-10 0 +10 [V]

- Maximum frequency

F02

X

Set value:4,5

Analog input terminal

[12] , [V2]

Related functions:

E01 to E09

(Set value 21)


Maximum frequency

0

0 4 20 [mA]

Inverse operation

(set value: 7)

This function sets the operation command input method.

F 0 2 O P R

Analog input terminal

[C1]

Operation method

M E T H O D

Setting range 0: Key pad operation

Forward operation

(set value: 2)

Press the for reverse operation.

Input from terminals

[FWD] and [REV] is ignored.

(LOCAL)

See the function explanation C21 to C28 for details.

11: Setting by digital input or pulse train

* Optional. For details, see the instruction manual on options.

3: Terminal operation( key active) with Fuji start software.

4: Terminal operation( key inactive) with Fuji start software.

* - This function can only be changed when terminals FWD and REV are open.

- REMOTE/LOCAL switching from the keypad panel automatically changes the set value of this function.

- REMOTE/LOCAL can be changed by pressing the key and key simultaneously.

STOP

5-7

START SOFTWARE SELECTION DURING TERMINAL OPERATION

POWER ON

POWER

FWD

OUTPUT

ALARM

Inactive : Setting 1 or 2

POWER

FWD

OUTPUT

ALARM

Active : Setting 3 or 4

ER6

RESET

RESET

FWD

OUTPUT

ALARM

NETWORK

MODE

NETWORK

(LE-

CM)

FWD

(TERMINAL)

FWD

(NETWORK)

OUTPUT

ALARM

RESET

FWD

OUTPUT

ALARM

NETWORK

(LE-

CM)

FWD

. (TERMIAL)

FWD

(NETWORK)

OUTPUT

ALARM

ER6

ER6

RESET

ER6

NOTE) Safety software does not work at AUTO RESET mode and PRGRAMMING mode.

STOP KEY MODE SELCTION DURING TURMINAL OPERATION

STOP KEY

(Terminal mode)

FWD

STOP

OUTPUT

ALARM

Inactive : Setting 2 or 4

STOP KEY

(Network mode)

NETWORK

(LE-

CM)

FWD

.

(NETWORK)

STOP

OUTPUT

ALARM

5-8

Active : Seeting 1 or 3

FWD

STOP

OUTPUT

ALARM

NETWORK

(LE-

CM)

FWD

. (NETWORK)

STOP

OUTPUT

ALARM

ER6

ER6

[LE]

Frequency setting

F01 C30

[Hz2/Hz1] or

[Hz1/Hz2]

[12]

Gain Bias

C31 C32

[C1]

[V2]

[V1]

Option

[IVS]

[UP]

[DOWN]

0

C30 is selected

and C30=#1, #6

Frequency setting by keypad panel

∨ ∧

#0

+

+

+

+

Inverse

Inverse

+

+

C33

Analog input filter

C30

0

F01

#3

#2

#7

#6

#5

#1

#4

#2, #3,

#7

Forward/

Reverse operation

Gain

F17

Bias frequency

F18

Negative polarity prevention

#1,#2,#3,#6,#7

[SS1]

[SS2]

[SS4]

[SS8]

[JOG]

[Hz2/PID]

UP/DOWN control

#8,#9

D/I or pulse train (optional)

Pattern operation control

C21

C22

C23

C24

C25

C26

C27

C28

Switching command

C05

C06

C07

C08

C09

C10

C11

#11

#10

C12

C13

C14

C15

C16

C17

C18

C19

Multistep frequency switching

H30

Set frequency value by Link function

Multistep frequencies 1 to 15

JOG frequency

C20

Feedback selection

H21 H25

Feedback filter

PID control

H20

Operation selection

H22

Proportional

H23

Integral

H24

Differential

Limit signal

Maximum frequency

Limiter processing

F03 A01

Upper-limit frequency

F15

Jump frequency

C01

C02

C03

C04

Lower-limit frequency

F16

Set frequency value note) The numbers marked "#" means the setting value of each functions.

Frequency setting block diagram

5-9

F03 Maximum frequency 1

X

This function sets the maximum output frequency for motor 1.

X

This is a function for motor 1.

F 0 3 M A X H z - 1

Setting range G11S: 50 to 400 Hz

P11S:

Setting a value higher than the rated value of the device to be driven may damage the motor or machine.

Match the rating of the device.

F04

Base frequency 1

X

This function sets the maximum output frequency in the constant-torque range of motor 1 or the output frequency at the rated output voltage. Match the rating of the motor.

X


F 0 4 B A S E H z - 1

Setting range G11S: 25 to 400Hz

25

Note: When the set value of base frequency 1 is higher than that of maximum output frequency 1, the output voltage does not increase to the rated voltage because the maximum frequency limits the output frequency.

Output voltage

Constant-torque range

F06 Maximum output voltage 1

F05 Rated voltage 1

F07

F08

Acceleration time 1

Deceleration time 1

X

This function sets the acceleration time for the output frequency from startup to maximum frequency and the deceleration time from maximum frequency to operation stop.

F 0 7

F 0 8

A C C

D E C

T I M E 1

T I M E 1

Setting range Acceleration time 1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds

Deceleration time 1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds

Acceleration and deceleration times are represented by the three most significant digits, thereby the setting of three high-order digits can be set.

Set acceleration and deceleration times with respect to maximum frequency. The relationship between the set frequency value and acceleration/deceleration times is as follows:

Set frequency = maximum frequency

The actual operation time matches the set value.

FWD STOP

Maximum frequency

Set frequency

Time

Output frequency

0

F04 Base frequency 1

F03 Maximum output frequency

F05 Rated voltage 1

X

This function sets the rated value of the voltage output to motor 1. Note that a voltage greater than the supply

(input) voltage cannot be output.

X


F 0 5 R A T E D V - 1

Setting range 230 V series: 0, 80 to 240V

460 V series: 0, 320 to 480V

Value 0 terminates operation of the voltage regulation function, thereby resulting in the output of a voltage proportional to the supply voltage.

Note: When the set value of rated voltage 1 exceeds maximum output voltage 1, the output voltage does not increase to the rated voltage because the maximum output voltage limits the output voltage.

F06

Maximum voltage 1

X

This function sets the maximum value of the voltage output for motor 1. Note that a voltage higher than the supply (input) voltage cannot be output.

X


F 0 6 M A X V - 1

Setting range 230 V series: 80 to 240V

460 V series: 320 to 480V

Note: When the set value of rated voltage 1 (F05) to "0", this function is invalid.

5-10

Acceleration time Deceleration time

Set frequency < maximum frequency

The actual operation time differs from the set value.

Acceleration(deceleration) operation time = set value x

(set frequency/maximum frequency)

FWD

STOP

Acceleration operation time

Acceleration time

Maximum frequency

Deceleration operation time

Set frequency

Deceleration time

Time

Note: If the set acceleration and deceleration times are too short even though the resistance torque and moment of inertia of the load are great, the torque limiting function or stall prevention function becomes activated, thereby prolonging the operation time beyond that stated above.

F09 Torque boost 1

X

This is a function for motor 1. The following can be selected:

F 0 9 T R Q B O O S T 1

-- Selection of load characteristics such as automatic torque boost, square law reduction torque load, proportional torque load, constant torque load.

-- Enhancement of torque (V/f characteristics), which is lowered during low-speed operation. Insufficient magnetic flux of the motor due to a voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated.

Setting range Characteristics selected

0.0

0.1 to 0.9

1.0 to 1.9

Automatic torque boost characteristic where the torque boost value of a constant torque load (a linear change) is automatically adjusted.

The motor tuning (P04 / A13) should be set to "2" for this function is valid.

Square law reduction torque for fan and pump loads.

Proportional torque for middle class loads between square law reduction torque and constant torque (linear change)

2.0 to 20.0 Constant torque (linear change)

X

Torque characteristics(30HP or less)

<Square law reduction torque> <Proportional torque>

Output voltage V

100%

Rated voltage 1

Output voltage V

Rated voltage 1

100%

#0.9

17%

#0.1

0

Output frequency f

<Constant torque>

Base frequency 1

Output voltage V

Rated voltage 1

100%

17%

0

#1.9

Base frequency 1

#1.0

Output frequency f

23%

#20.0

#2.0

Base frequency 1

0

Output frequency f

X

Torque characteristics(40HP or above)

<Square law reduction torque> <Proportional torque>

Output voltage V

100%

Rated voltage 1

Output voltage V

Rated voltage 1

100%

<Constant torque>

Output voltage V

Rated voltage 1

100%

10%

#20.0

#2.0

Base frequency 1

0

Output frequency f

Note: As a large torque boost value creates overexcitation in the low-speed range, continued operation may cause the motor to overheating. Check the characteristics of the driven motor.

F10

F11

Electric thermal O/L relay ( select)

Electric thermal O/L relay (level)

F12 Electric thermal O/L relay (Thermal time constant)

The electronic thermal O/L relay manages the output frequency, output current, and operation time of the inverter to prevent the motor from overheating when

150% of the set current value flows for the time set by

F12 (thermal time constant).

X


X

This function specifies whether to operate the electronic thermal O/L relay and selects the target motor. When a general-purpose motor is selected, the operation level is lowered in the low speed range according to the cooling characteristics of the motor.

F 1 0 E L C T R N O L 1

Set value 0: Inactive

1: Active (for general-purpose motor)

2: Active (for inverter motor)

X

This function sets the operation level (current value) of the electronic thermal. Enter a value from 1 to 1.1 times the current rating value of the motor.

X

The set value "2" is set for the inverter motor because there is no cooling effect decrease by the rotational speed.

F 1 1 O L L E V E L 1

The setting range is 20 to 135% of the rated current of the inverter.

(%)

When F10 = 2

18%

0

#0.9

#0.1

Base frequency 1

Output frequency f

18%

0

#1.9

Base frequency 1

#1.0

Output frequency f

69

54

0.2 to 22kW

40 to 60HP

(When F10 = 1

)

When F10 = 1

) fe= fb (fb

<

60Hz)

60Hz (fb

≥

60Hz)

fb:

Base frequency

Fe x 0.33

Fe x 0.83

fe

Output frequency f

0

(Hz)

Operation level current and output frequency

5-11

(%)

100

90

(When F10 = 1

)

53 fe= fb (fb

<

60Hz)

60Hz (fb

≥

60Hz)

fb:

Base frequency

(%)

100

90

85

Fe x 0.33

Fe x 0.83

fe

Output frequency f

0

(Hz)


(When F10 = 1

)

53 fe= fb (fb

<

60Hz)

60Hz (fb

≥

60Hz)

fb:

Base frequency

Fe x 0.33

Fe x 0.83

fe

Output frequency f

0

(Hz)


X

The time from when 150% of the operation level current flows continuously to when he electronic thermal O/L relay activates can be set.

The setting range is 0.5 to 75.0 minutes (in 0.1 minute steps).

F 1 2 T I M E C N S T 1

20

Current-Operation time Characteristics

F13

Electric thermal O/L relay (for breaking resistor)

This function controls the frequent use and continuous operating time of the braking resistor to prevent the resistor from overheating.

F 1 3 D B R O L

Related functions:

U59

Inverter capacity

G11S: 10HP or less

P11S: 15HP or less

Operation

0: Inactive

1: Active (built-in braking resistor)

2: Active

(DB***-2C/4C external braking resistor)

0: Inactive

2: Active

(DB***-2C/4C external braking resistor)

G11S: 15HP or more

P11S: 20HP or more

0: Inactive

X

When the setting value is selected to "2", the type of braking resistor and connection circuit are set by U59.

The details are referred to the function : U59.

15

10

5

0

0 50

(output current/operation level current) x 100(% )

100 150 changed by F12

F12=10

F12=5

200

F12=0.5

5-12

F14

Restart mode after momentary power failure

X

This function selects operation if a momentary power failure occurs.

The function for detecting power failure and activating protective operation (i.e., alarm output, alarm display, inverter output cutoff) for undervoltage can be selected. The automatic restart function (for automatically restarting a coasting motor without stopping) when the supply voltage is recovered can also be selected.

X

When setting value is selected "2" or "3", both integration constant and the proportional constant during operation ride-though can be adjusted by the function code : U23 and U24. The details are referred to the function code : U23 and

U24.

F 1 4 R E S T A R T

Setting range: 0 to 5

The following table lists the function details.

Related functions:

U23, U24

Set value

Function name

０

Inactive

(immediate inverter trip)

１

Inactive

(inverter trip at recovery)

２

Inactive

(inverter trip after

deceleration to a stop at power failure)

Note1

３

Active

(operation ride through, for high-inertia loads)

Note1

Operation at power failure

If undervoltage is detected, the drive will immediately trip and an undervoltage fault (LU) is displayed. The drive output stops and the motor will coast to a stop.

If undervoltage is detected, the drive output stops and the motor will immediately coast to a stop. A drive fault is not activated

When the DC bus voltage reaches the continue operation voltage level (H15), a controlled deceleration to a stop occurs.

The drive operation is not automatically restarted. Input a reset command and

The inverter collects the inertia energy of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage and controls the motor until it stops, then operation command to restart operation. an undervoltage fault (LU) is activated.

The drive will automatically decrease the deceleration time if necessary. If the amount of inertia energy from the load is small, and the undervoltage level is achieved before the motor stops, the undervoltage fault is immediately activated and the motor will coast to a stop.

When the DC bus voltage reaches the continue operation Operation is automatically restarted. voltage level (H15), energy is collected from the inertia of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage and extend the ride

For power recovery during ride-through the drive will accelerate directly to the original through time. The drive will automatically adjust the frequency. If undervoltage is detected, deceleration rate to maintain DC bus voltage level. If operation automatically restarts with the undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not activated, but drive output stops and the motor coast to a stop. frequency at the time that the undervoltage is detected.

４

Active If undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not activated. The drive output stops and the motor will coast to a frequency at power failure)

Note1 stop.

５

Active

(restart with the start frequency, for low-inertia loads)

Note1

If undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not activated, but output stops.

Operation at power recovery

The drive operation is not automatically restarted. Input a reset command and operation command to restart operation.

An undervoltage fault (LU) is activated at power recovery. Drive operation is not automatically restarted. Input a reset command to restart operation.

Operation is automatically restarted with the frequency at power failure.

Operation is automatically restarted with the frequency set by F23, "Starting frequency."

Note1) When the function code H18(Torque control) is excluding "0" and Motor 1 is selected, the inverter will trip at power recovery if function code F14 is set to between "2" and "5". This operation is same as F14 is set to "1".

Function codes H13 to H16 are provided to control a restarting operation after momentary power failure. These functions should be understood and used. The pick-up (speed search) function can also be selected as a method of restarting when power is recovered following a momentary failure. (For setting details, see function code H09.)

The pick-up function searches for the speed of the coasting motor to restart the motor without subjecting it to excessive shock.

In a high-inertia system, the reduction in motor speed is minimal even when the motor is coasting. A speed searching time is required when the pick-up function is active. In such a case, the original frequency may be recovered sooner when the function is inactive and the operation restarted with the frequency prior to the momentary power failure.

The pick-up function works in the range of 5 to 100 Hz. If the detected speed is outside this range, restart the motor using the regular restart function.

WARNING

•

Automatically restart could be provided at power recovered, if "Restart mode after momentary power failure" is valid.

•

The machine should be designed to securing the human safe even restarting.


5-13

Set value : 0

Main circuit DC voltage

Power failure Power recovery

Under voltage

Output frequency

LV trip

Set value : 1


Output frequency

LV trip

Set value : 2


Output frequency

LV trip

ON

Set value : 3


Power failure Power recovery

H15

Operation continuation level

Time

Output frequency

(motor speed)

LV trip

ON

Under voltage

Time

Set value : 4


ON

H15

Operation continuation level

Time

Output frequency

(motor speed)

LV trip

IPF

(terminals

Y1 to Y5)

Set value : 5


Under voltage

H13:Waiting time

Under voltage

ON

Synchroni-

zation

Acceleration

Output frequency

(motor speed)

LV trip

H13:Waiting time

Note : Dotted-dashed lines indicate motor speed.

5-14

F15

Frequency limiter (High)

F16

Frequency limiter (Low)

X

This function sets the upper and lower limits for the setting frequency .

F 1 5 H L I M I T E R

F 1 6 L L I M I T E R

Setting range G11S: 0 to 400Hz

P11S: 0 to 120Hz

Set frequency

+ Maximum frequency

Upper limit value

-

100%

Upper limit value

Lower limit value

Lower limit value

+100%

Set frequency

- Maximum frequency

※ The inverter output starts with the start frequency when operation begins, and stops with the stop frequency when operation ends.

※

If the upper limit value is less than the lower limit value, the upper limit value overrides the lower limit value.

※

When lower limit value is set, the inverter operates with lower limit value at operation command is "ON" even frequency command is zero(0Hz).

F17

Gain

X

This function sets the rate of the set frequency value to analog input.

F 1 7 F R E Q G A I N

Operation follows the figure below.

Set frequency value

+Maximum

frequency

-Maximum

frequency

200%

100%

50%

-10 0 +10[V]

4 20［mA］

Analog input

+10V terminal 12

20mA terminal C1

F18 Bias frequency

X

This function adds a bias frequency to the set frequency value to analog input.

F 1 8 F R E Q B I A S

Setting range G11S: -400.0 to +400.0Hz

P11S: -120.0 to +120.0Hz

The operation follows the figure below.

When the bias frequency is higher than the maximum frequency or lower than the - maximum frequency, it is limited to the maximum or - maximum frequency.

Set frequency value

+Maximum frequency

Bias frequency

(when positive)

-10 0 +10[V]

4 20[mA]

-Maximum frequency

Analog input

+10V terminal 12

20mA terminal C1

Bias frequency

(when negative)

※ Reversible operation is valid if the function code

F01/C30 is set to "4" or "5" only.

※ This function is invalid if PID control is selected(H20 is

"1" or "2").

F20

F21

DC brake (starting frequency)

DC brake (Braking level)

F22 DC brake (Braking time)

X

Starting frequency: This function sets the frequency with which to start a DC injection brake to decelerate the motor to a stop.

F 2 0 D C B R K H z

Setting range: 0 to 60Hz

X

Operation level: This function sets the output current level when a DC injection brake is applied. Set a percentage of inverter rated output current in 1% steps.

D C B R K L V L

Setting range G11S: 0 to 100%

P11S: 0 to 80%

X

Time: This function sets the time of a DC injection brake operation.

F 2 2 D C B R K t

Setting range 0.0: Inactive

0.1 to 30.0 seconds

CAUTION

Do not use the inverter brake function for mechanical holding.


5-15

F23

F24

F25

Starting frequency (frequency)

Start frequency (Holding time)

Stop frequency

The starting frequency can be set to reserve the torque at startup and can be sustained until the magnetic flux of the motor is being established.

X

Frequency: This function sets the frequency at startup.

F 2 3 S T A R T H z

Setting range: 0.1 to 60Hz

X

Holding time: This function sets the holding time during which the start frequency is sustained at startup.

F 2 4 H O L D I N G t

Set values: 0.1 to 10.0 seconds

∗

The holding time does not apply at the time of switching between forward and reverse.

∗

The holding time is not included in the acceleration time.

∗

The holding time also applies when pattern operation (C21) is selected. The holding time is included in the timer value.

X

This function sets the frequency at stop.

F 2 5 S

Setting range: 0.0 to 60.0Hz

Output frequency

Forward rotation

Starting frequency

Stopping frequency

Holding time

Time

The operation does not start when the starting frequency is less than the stopping frequency or when the setting frequency is less than the stopping frequency.

F26

Motor sound (carrier frequency)

X

This function adjusts the carrier frequency, correct adjustment of which prevents resonance with the machine system, reduces motor and inverter noise, and also reduces leakage current from output circuit wiring.

F 2 6 M T R S O U N D


G11

75HP or less

100HP or more

30HP or less

P11

40HP to 100HP

125HP or more

Setting range

0.75 to 15kHz

0.75 to 10kHz

0.75 to 15kHz

0.75 to 10kHz

0.75 to 6kHz

Carrier frequency

Motor noise

Output current waveform

Leakage current

Noise occurrence

Low High

High Low

Bad Good

Small amount Large amount

Extremely low High

Notes:

1. Reducing the set value adversely affects the output current waveform (i.e., higher harmonics), increases motor loss, and raises motor temperature. For example, at 0.75kHz, reduce the motor torque by about15%.

2 Increasing the set value increases inverter loss and raises inverter temperature.

5-16

F27 Motor sound (sound tone)

X

The tone of motor noise can be altered when the carrier frequency is 7kHz or lower. Use this function as required.

F 2 7 M T R T O N E

Setting range: 0 , 1, 2 , 3

F30 FMA (voltage adjust)

F31 FMA (function)

Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can be output to terminal FMA as a DC voltage. The amplitude of the output can also be adjusted.

X

This function adjusts the voltage value of the monitor item selected in F31 when the monitor amount is 100%.

A value from 0 to 200 (%) can be set in 1% steps.

F 3 0 F M A V - A D J

Setting range: 0 to 200%

Higher than 10V

10V

F30:200%

F30:100%

5V

F30:50% terminal FMA.

50% 100%

X

This function selects the monitor item to be output to

F 3 1 F M A

F30:0%

F U N C

Set value

Monitor item

0 Output frequency 1

(before slip compensation)

1 Output frequency 2

(after slip compensation)

3 Output voltage

4 Output torque

5 Load rate

6 Power consumption

Definition of 100% monitor amount

Maximum output frequency


Rated output current of inverter x 2

230V series: 250V

460V series: 500V

Rated torque of motor x 2

Rated load of motor x 2

Rated output of inverter x 2

7 PID feedback amount Feedback amount of 100%

8 PG feedback amount Synchronous speed at

(only when option is installed) maximum frequency

9 DC link circuit voltage 230V series: 500V

460V series: 1,000V

0 to 10V output through communication and not related to inverter operation.

※ The power consumption shows "0" during regenerative load.

F33

F34

FMP (pulse rate)

FMP (voltage adjust)

F35

FMP terminal (function)

Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can be output to terminal FMP as pulse voltage. Monitor data can also be sent to an analog meter as average voltage.

When sending data to a digital counter or other instrument as pulse output, set the pulse rate in F33 to any value and the voltage in F34 to 0%.

When data is sent to an analog meter or other instrument as average voltage, the voltage value set in F34 determines the average voltage and the pulse rate in F33 is fixed to 2670 (p/s).

X

This function sets the pulse frequency of the monitor item selected in F35 within a range of 300 to 6000 (p/s) in 1 p/s steps.

F 3 3 F M P P U L S E S

Setting range: 300 to 6,000 p/s

T1

0V

V

L

:0.5V

MAX

T

Pulse cycle time

Pulse frequency (p/s) = 1/T

About 15.6V

Duty (%) = T1/T x 100

Average voltage (V) = 15.6 x T1/T

The output terminal of the FMP terminal is composed of the transistor, therefore there is a saturation voltage

(0.5V

MAX

). When using in the analogue by the filter processing the pulse voltage, it should be make a 0V adjustment by external equipment.

X

This function sets the average voltage of pulse output to terminal FMP.

F 3 4 F M P V - A D J

Setting range

0%: The pulse rate varies depending on the monitor amount of the monitor item selected in F35. (The maximum value is the value set in F33. The pulse duty is fixed at 50%.)

1 to 200%: Pulse rate is fixed at 2,670 p/s. The average voltage of the monitor item selected in F35 when the monitor amount is 100% is adjusted in the 1 to 200% range

(1% steps).

(The pulse duty varies.)

X

This function selects the monitor item to be output to terminal FMP.

F 3 5 F M P F U N C

The set value and monitor items are the same as those of F31.

F36 30Ry operation mode

X

This function specifies whether to activate (excite) the alarm output relay (30Ry) for any fault at normal or alarm status.

F 3 6 3 0 R Y M O D E

Set value

Operation

0

1

At normal 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON

At abnormal 30A - 30C: ON, 30B - 30C:OFF

At normal 30A - 30C:ON, 30B - 30C: OFF

At abnormal 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON

X

When the set value is 1, contacts 30A and 30C are connected when the inverter control voltage is established (about one second after power on).

X

When the power is off, contacts 30A and 30C are OFF;

30B and 30C are ON.

30A

30B

30

5-17

30C

F40

F41

Torque limiter 1 (driving)

Torque limiter 1 (braking)

X

The torque limit operation calculates motor torque from the output voltage, current and the primary resistance value of the motor, and controls the frequency so the calculated value does not exceed the limit. This operation enables the inverter to continue operation under the limit even if a sudden change in load torque occurs.

X

Select limit values for the driving torque and braking torque.

X

When this function is activated, acceleration and deceleration operation times are longer than the set values.

X


X

The increase frequency upper bound during torque limit operation is set by function code : U01.

X

When the setting value is selected "0" (prevent OU trip), the operation mode is selected by function code : U60.

The details are referred to the functions : U01, U60.

F 4 0

F 4 1

D R V

B R K

Related functions:

T R Q 1

T R Q 1

U01, U60

Operation

G11S:20% to 200%

P11S:20% to 150%

The torque is limited to the set value.

Torque limit

(driving)

Torque limit

(braking)

999

G11S:20% to 200%

P11S:20% to 150%

0

999

Torque limiting inactive

The torque is limited to the set value.

Prevents OU trip due to power regeneration effect automatically.

Torque limiting inactive

WARNING

When the torque limit function is selected, an operation may not match the set acceleration and deceleration time or set speed. The machine should be so designed that safety is ensured even when operation does not match set values.


WARNING

Output frequency can't be lower by reducing U01:

Maximum compensation frequency during braking limit or

F15: High frequency limit, during braking limit condition which output frequency is increasing. Set U01 or F15 when braking torque limit is not active.


F42

Torque vector control 1

X


X

To obtain the motor torque most efficiently, the torque vector control calculates torque according to load, to adjust the voltage and current vectors to optimum values based on the calculated value.

Related functions:

P01, P09

F 4 2 T R Q V E C T O R 1

Set value Operation

0 Inactive

1 Active

X

When 1 (Active) is set, the set values of the following functions differ from the written values: c F09 Torque boost 1

Automatically set to 0.0 (automatic torque boosting). d P09 Slip compensation amount Slip compensation is automatically activated.

When 0.0 is set, the amount of slip compensation for the FUJI standard 3-phase motor is applied.

Otherwise, the written value is applied.

X

Use the torque vector control function under the following conditions: c There must be only one motor.

Connection of two or more motors makes accurate control difficult. d The function data (rated current P03, no-load current

P06, %R1 P07, and %X P08) of motor 1 must be correct.

When the standard FUJI 3-phase motor is used, setting the capacity (function P02) ensures entry of the above data. An auto tuning operation should be performed for other motors. e The rated current of the motor must not be significantly less than the rated current of the inverter. A motor two ranks lower in capacity than the nominal applied motor for the inverter should be used at the smallest

(depending on the model). f To prevent leakage current and ensure accurate control, the length of the cable between the inverter and motor should not exceed 164ft(50m). g When a reactor is connected between the inverter and the motor and the impedance of the wiring cannot be disregarded, use P04, "Auto tuning," to rewrite data.

5-18

If these conditions are not satisfied, set 0 (Inactive).

E01

E09

E:Extension Terminal Functions

X1 Terminal function

X9 Terminal function

Each function of digital input terminals X1 to X9 can be set as codes.

E 0 1 X 1 F U N C

E 0 2 X 2 F U N C

E 0 3 X 3 F U N C

E 0 4 X 4 F U N C

E 0 5 X 5 F U N C

E 0 6 X 6 F U N C

E 0 7 X 7 F U N C

E 0 8 X 8 F U N C

E 0 9 X 9 F U N C

Set value

Function

0,1,2,3

Multistep frequency selection (1 to 15 steps) [SS1],[SS2],[SS4],[SS8]

4,5 Acceleration and deceleration time selection (3 steps) [RT1],[RT2]

6

7

Self-hold selection [HLD]

Coast-to-stop command [BX]

Alarm reset [RST]

External alarm [THR]

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Jogging [JOG]

Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 [Hz2/Hz1]

Motor 2/motor 1 [M2/M1]

DC injection brake command [DCBRK]

Torque limit 2/torque limit 1 [TL2/TL1]

Switching operation from line to inverter (50Hz) [SW50]

Switching operation from line to inverter (60Hz) [SW60]

32

33

34

35

17

18

19

20

21

22

UP command [UP]

DOWN command [DOWN]

Edit permission command (data change permission) [WE-KP]

PID control cancellation [Hz/PID]

Forward/inverse switching (terminals 12 and C1) [IVS]

23

24

25

Interlock (52-2) [IL]

Torque control cancellation [Hz/TRQ]

Link operation selection (Standard:RS-485, Option: BUS) [LE]

Universal DI [U-DI]

26 Start characteristics selection [STM]

27

PG-SY enable ( Option ) [PG/Hz]

28 Synchronization command ( Option ) [SYC]

29

Zero speed command with PG option [ZERO]

30

31

Forced stop command [STOP1]

Forced stop command with Deceleration time 4 [STOP2]

Pre-exiting command with PG option [EXITE]

Line speed control Cancellation [Hz/LSC]

Line speed frequency memory [LSC-HLD]

Frequency setting 1 / Frequency setting 2 [Hz1/Hz2]

Note: Data numbers which are not set in the functions from E01 to E09, are assumed to be inactive.

Multistep frequency selection [SS1][SS2][SS4][SS8]

The frequency can be switched to a preset frequency in function codes C05 to C19 by switching the external digital input signal.

Assign values 0 to 3 to the target digital input terminal. The combination of input signals determines the frequency.

Combination of set value input signals

Frequency selected

3

[SS8]

2

[SS4]

1

[SS2]

0

[SS1]

off off off off

Assigned by F01 or C30

off off off on

C05 MULTI Hz-1

off off on off

C06 MULTI Hz-2

off off on on

C07 MULTI Hz-3

off on off off

C08 MULTI Hz-4

off on off on

C09 MULTI Hz-5

off on on off

C10 MULTI Hz-6

off on on on off off on off off on off on

C11 MULTI Hz-7

C12 MULTI Hz-8

C13 MULTI Hz-9

Related function

C05 to C19

Setting range

G11S:0.00 to 400.00Hz

P11S:0.00 to 120.00Hz

on off on off

C14 MULTI Hz-10

on off on on

C15 MULTI Hz-11

on on off off

C16 MULTI Hz-12

on on off on

C17 MULTI Hz-13

on on on off

C18 MULTI Hz-14

on on on on

C19 MULTI Hz-15

Acceleration and deceleration time selection [RT1][RT2]

The acceleration and deceleration time can be switched to a preset time in function codes E10 to E15 by switching the external digital input signal. Assign values 4 and 5 to the target digital input terminal. The combination of input signals determines the acceleration and deceleration times.


5 4

[RT2] [RT1]

Acceleration and deceleration times selected

Setting range

0.01 to 3600s

off on on off

E10 ACC TIME2

E11 DEC TIME2

E12 ACC TIME3

E13 DEC TIME3


F07～F08

E10～E15

on on

E14 ACC TIME4

E15 DEC TIME4

3-wire operation stop command [HLD]

This selection is used for 3-wire operation. The FWD or REV signal is self-held when [HLD] is on, and the self-hold is cleared when [HLD] is turned off. To use this [HLD] terminal function, assign 6 to the target digital input terminal.

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

FW D

ON

Ignore d

ON

REV

HLD

ON

ON ON

ON

5-19

Coast-to-stop command [BX]

When BX and CM are connected, inverter output is cut off immediately and the motor starts to coast-to-stop. An alarm signal is neither output nor self-held. If BX and CM are disconnected when the operation command (FWD or

REV) is on, operation starts at the start frequency. To use this BX terminal function, assign value "7" to the target digital input terminal.

Output

Frequency

Forward rotation

Ignored

Forward rotation

Forward rotation

FWD

ON ON

REV ON

BX ON ON

Alarm reset [RST]

When an inverter trip occurs, connecting RST and CM clears the alarm output (for any fault) ; disconnecting them clears trip indication and restarts operation. To use this RST terminal function, assign value "8" to the target digital input terminal.

External fault [THR]

Disconnecting THR and CM during operation cuts off inverter output (i.e., motor starts to coast-to-stop) and outputs alarm OH2, which is self-held internally and cleared by RST input. This function is used to protect an external brake resistor and other components from overheating. To use this THR terminal function, assign value "9" to the target digital input terminal. ON input is assumed when this terminal function is not set.

Jogging operation[JOG]

This function is used for jogging (inching) operation to position a work piece. When JOG and CM are connected, the operation is performed with the jogging frequency set in function code C20 while the operation command (FWD-CM or REV-CM) is on. To use this

JOG terminal function, assign value "10" to the target digital input terminal.

Note: It is possible to change to the JOG operation by keypad panel when keypad panel operation.

JOG

Input

ON

OFF

ON

Operation command

(FWD/REV)

Operation mode

OFF

ON

OFF

STOP RUN STOP

ON

RUN

OFF

STOP

ON

RUN

OFF

ON

STOP RUN

JOG

OPR.

JOG

OPR.

NOR.

OPR.

NOR.

OPR.

WARNING

- When the JOG command and operation command

(FWD/REV) are input at the same time, it can NOT be changed to the JOG operation. It operates with setting frequency.

- When the JOG operation is used, it should be input the operation command after input the JOG command during the inverter is STOP.

- When the JOG command and operation command are input at the same time, the JOG command is assigned to the "Multistep frequency selection (SS1 to SS8)" and used it.

- The inverter can NOT be stopped and JOG operation is continued even JOG command is OFF during JOG operation. The inverter is deceleration to a stop if the operation command is OFF.


Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 [Hz1/Hz2]

This function switches the frequency setting method set in function codes F01 and C30 by an external digital input signal.

Set value input signal

11

Frequency setting method selected

off on

F01 FREQ CMD1

C30 FREQ CMD2

Note: It can not be used with set value "35" simultaneously. When the set value "11" and "35" are selected, "Er6" is displayed.

Motor 2/motor 1 [M1/M2]

This function switches motor constants using an external digital input signal.

This input is effective only when the operation command to the inverter is off and operation has stopped and does not apply to the operation at 0Hz.


12

Motor selected


A01～A18

off

Motor 1

on

Motor 2

DC brake command [DCBRK]

When the external digital input signal is on, DC injection braking starts when the inverter's output frequency drops below the frequency preset in function code F20 after the operation command goes off. (The operation command

5-20 operation and when both terminals FWD and REV go on or off at terminal block operation.) The DC injection braking continues while the digital input signal is on. In this case, the longer time of the following is selected:

- The time set in function code F22.

- The time which the input signal is set on.


13 off on

Operation selected

No DC injection brake command is given.

A DC injection brake command is given.

Torque limit 2/torque limit 1 [TL2/TL1]

This function switches the torque limit value set in function codes F40 and F41, and E16 and E17 by an external digital input signal.


14

Torque limit value selected


F40～F41

E16～E17

off on

F40 DRV TRQ1

F41 BRK TRQ1

E16 DRV TRQ2

E17 BRK TRQ2

Setting range

DRV 20 to 200% ,999

BRK 0, 20 to 200% ,999

Switching operation between line and inverter (50Hz) [SW50]

Motor operation can be switched from 50Hz commercial power operation to inverter operation without stopping the motor by switching the external digital input signal.


15

Function

off

→on

on

→off

Inverter operation to line operation (50Hz)

Line operation to inverter operation (50Hz)

Switching operation between line and inverter (60Hz) [SW60]

Motor operation can be switched from 60Hz commercial power operation to inverter operation without stopping the motor by switching the external digital input signal.


18

17


16

Function

off

→on

on

→off

Inverter operation to line operation (60Hz)

Line operation to inverter operation (60Hz)

X

When the digital input signal goes off, 50 or 60 Hz is output according to the set value input signal after the restart waiting time following a momentary power failure

(function code H13). The motor is then directed to inverter operation.

WARNING

- After the LU(Low Voltage) trip is occurred and reset it, the inverter will automatically restart because the operation command is kept by internal sequence.


UP command [UP]/DOWN command [DOWN]

When an operation command is input (on), the output frequency can be increased or decreased by an external digital input signal.

The change ranges from 0 to maximum frequency.

Operation in the opposite direction of the operation command is not allowed.


F01, C30


E01～E09

(set value: 11, 35)

9

(UP/DOWN2)

Function selected

(when operation command is on)

off on on on

Holds the output frequency.

There are the two types of UP/DOWN operations as shown below. Set the desired type by setting the frequency (F01 or C30).

X

The data "8: UP/DOWN 1" is valid only when the Motor

2 is selected.

Frequency setting

(F01 or C30)

on off

Increases the output frequency according to the acceleration time.

Decreases the output frequency according to the deceleration time.

Initial value at power input on

Operation command reentry during deceleration

8

(UP/DOWN1)

0Hz

Operates at the frequency at reentry.

Frequency

FWD ON

(REV) OFF

Previous frequency

Returns to the frequency before deceleration

Frequency

FWD ON

(REV) OFF

Write enable for KEYPAD [WE-KP]

This function allows the data to be changed only when an external signal is being input, thereby making it difficult to change the data.

19 Function selected

off on

Inhibit data changes.

Allow data changes.

Note:

If a terminal is set to value 19, the data becomes unable to be changed. To change the data, turn on the terminal and change the terminal setting to another number.

PID control cancel [Hz/PID]

The PID control can be disabled by an external digital input signal.

Set value input signal Function selected


H20～H25

20

off on

Enable PID control.

Disable PID control

(frequency setting from keypad panel).

5-21

Inverse mode changeover [IVS]

The analog input (terminals 12 and C1) can be switched between forward and inverse operations by an external digital input signal.



F01, C30

21

off on

Forward operation when forward operation is set and vice versa

Inverse operation when forward operation is set and vice versa

X

This function is invalid when the PID control is selected(H20: 1 or 2).

Interlock signal (52-2) [IL]

When a contactor is installed on the output side of the inverter, the contactor opens at the time of a momentary power failure, which hinders the reduction of the DC circuit voltage and may prevent the detection of a power failure and the correct restart operation when power is recovered. The restart operation at momentary power failure can be performed effectively with power failure information provided by an external digital input signal.


22 off

Function selected


F14 on

No momentary power failure detection operation by digital input

Momentary power failure detection operation by digital input

Torque control cancel [Hz/TRQ]

When function code H18 (torque control function selection) is set to be active (value 1 or 2), this operation can be canceled externally

Assign value "23" to the target digital input terminal and switch between operation and no operation in this input signal state.


23

Function selected


H18 off

Torque control function active

The input voltage to terminal 12 is the torque command value.

on

Torque control function inactive

The input voltage to terminal 12 is the frequency command value.

PID feedback amount when PID control operation is selected (H20 = 1 or 2).

WARNING

- The motor speed may be changed quickly when the

"Torque control cancel" is changed to ON or OFF because of changing the control.


5-22

FWD or REV

[STOP1] or

[STOP2]

Alarm

Link enable (RS-485 standard, BUS) [LE]

Frequency and operation commands from the link can be enabled or disabled by switching the external digital input signal. Select the command source in H30, "Link function."

Assign value "24" to the target digital input terminal and enable or disable commands in this input signal state.



H30

24 off on

Link command disabled.

Link command enabled.

Universal DI (U-DI)

Assigning value "25" to a digital input terminal renders the terminal a universal DI terminal. The ON/OFF state of signal input to this terminal can be checked through the

RS-485 and BUS option.

This input terminal is only used to check for an incoming input signal through communication and does not affect inverter operation.

Pick up start mode [STM]

The start characteristics function (pick-up mode) in function code H09 can be enabled or disabled by switching the external digital input signal. Assign value

"26" to the target digital input terminal and enable or disable the function in this input signal state.


26

Function selected


H09

off on

Start characteristic function disabled

Start characteristic function enabled

PG-SY enable ( Option ) [PG/Hz]

Zero speed command with PG option [ZERO]

Pre-exiting command with PG option [EXITE]

These functions are used for PG-Option or

SY-Option card. Refer to each instruction manual.

Forced stop command with Deceleration [STOP1]

Forced stop command with Deceleration time 4 [STOP2]

Normally this terminal should be “ON”, when this terminal goes off during motor running, the motor decelerates to stop, and outputs alarm “Er6 “. When the inverter is stop by STOP1/STOP2 signal, the signal should be kept on

4ms or longer.

In case of terminal [STOP2], the deceleration time is determined by E15( DEC TIME4).

This function is prioritized under any operation (Terminal.

Keypad, Communication...operation). However when the torque limiter/regeneration avoidance at deceleration is selected, the time which is set by deceleration time may be longer.

Output

Frequency

In case of [STOP2], time is fixed by E15

(EDC TIME4)

ON

ON

ON

ON

Er6

Line speed control Cancellation [Hz/LSC]

Line speed frequency memory [LSC-HLD]

X

These functions are used for OPC-G11S-PG and PG2.

Refer to each instruction manual.

Frequency setting 1 / Frequency setting 2 [Hz1/Hz2]

X

This function switches the frequency setting method set in function codes F01 and C30 by an external digital input signal.

This is the reverse-logic of setting value

"11"(Frequency setting 2/Frequency setting 1

[Hz2/Hz1]).


35

Frequency setting method selected

off on

C30 FREQ CMD2

F01 FREQ CMD1

Note: It can not be used with set value "11" simultaneously. When the set value "11" and "35" are selected, "Er6" is displayed.

Settings when shipped from the factory

Digital input

Set value

Setting at factory shipment

Description

Terminal X1

Terminal X2

Terminal X3

Terminal X4

Terminal X5

Terminal X6

0 Multistep frequency selection [SS1]




4 Acceleration and deceleration selection

[RT1]

5 Acceleration and deceleration selection

[RT2]

6 Self-hold selection [HLD]

7 Coast-to-stop command [BX]

8 Alarm reset [RST]

Terminal X7

Terminal X8

Terminal X9

E10

E11

E12

E13





E14

E15



X

Acceleration time 1 (F07) and deceleration time 1 (F08) as well as three other types of acceleration and deceleration time can be selected.

X

The operation and setting ranges are the same as those of acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1. See explanations for F07 and F08.

X

For switching acceleration and deceleration times, select any two terminals from terminal X1 (function selection) in

E01 to terminal X9 (function selection) in E09 as switching signal input terminals. Set "4" (acceleration and deceleration time 1) and "5" (acceleration and deceleration time 2) to the selected terminals and input a signal to each terminal to switch acceleration and deceleration times. Switching is possible during acceleration, deceleration, or constant-speed operation.

5-23

Related functions

E01 to E09

(Set values:14)

E 1 0

E 1 1

A C C

D E C

T I M E 2

T I M E 2

E 1 2 A C C T I M E 3

E 1 3 D E C

E 1 4 A C C

T I M E 3

T I M E 4

E 1 5 D E C T I M E 4

X

Example: When 4 and 5 are set to terminals X2 and X3:

Operation

FWD

ON

Time

(REV)

X2

X3

CM

Output frequency

E 1 6 D R V

E 1 7 B R K

ON

ON

T R Q 2

T R Q 2

Maximum frequency

Accel

time

1

Decel

time

1

Accel

time

2

Decel

time

2

Accel

time

3

Decel

time

3

Accel

time

4

Decel

time

4

E16

E17

Torque limiter 2 (driving)

Torque limiter 2 (braking)

X

This function is used to switch the torque limit level set in F40 and F41 by an external control signal. Input an external signal by selecting any of the control input terminals (X1 to X9) as torque limit 2/torque limit 1

(value 14) in E01 to E09.

X


X

Maximum compensation frequency during braking torque limit is set by U01.


U01

U60

X

The operation mode is set by U60 when the setting value is "0%: Regeneration avoidance at deceleration".

The detail is referred to the U01, U60.


E01～E09

(Set value: 14)

E20

E24

Y1 terminal function

Y5A and Y5C terminal function

X

Some control and monitor signals can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5]. Terminals [Y1] to

[Y4] use transistor output; terminals[Y5A] and [Y5C] use relay contacts.

E 2 0 Y

E 2 1 Y

E 2 2 Y

E 2 3 Y

E 2 4 Y

Set value

Output signal

1 Frequency arrival [FAR]

2 Frequency detection [FDT1]

3 Stopping due to undervoltage [LV]

4 Torque polarity detection [B/D]

6 Restarting after momentary power failure [IPF]

7 Overload early warning [OL1]

8 During keypad panel operation [KP]

9 Inverter stopping [STP]

10 Ready for operation [RDY]

11 Operation switching between line and inverter [SW88]

12 Operation switching between line and inverter [SW52-2]

13 Operation switching between line and inverter [SW52-1]

14 Motor 2 switching [SWM2]

15 Terminal AX function [AX]

16 Pattern operation stage change [TU]

17 Pattern operation cycle operation completed [TO]

18 Pattern operation stage number [STG1]



25 Cooling fan operating [FAN]

26 Retry function operating [TRY]

27

Universal DO [U-DO]

∗

28 Heat sink overheat early warning [OH]

29

Synchronization completed by synchronous operation card [SY]

∗

30 Life expectancy detection signal [LIFE]

31 2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2]

32 2nd OL level detection [OL2]

33 Terminal C1 off signal [C1OFF]

34

Speed existence signal [DNZS]

∗

35

Speed agreement signal [DSAG]

∗

36

PG error signal [PG-ABN]

∗

37 Torque limiting (Signal with delay) [TL2]

Note: For output signals marked "

∗" are used for RS-485 communication, OPC-G11S-PG / PG2 or OPC-G11S-SY.


5-24

Inverter running [RUN]

"Running" means that the inverter is outputting a frequency. “RUN” signal is output as when there is output speed (frequency). When the DC injection brake function is active, “RUN” signal is off.

Frequency equivalence signal [FAR]

See the explanation of function code E30 (frequency arrival [detection width]).

Frequency level detection [FDT1]

See the explanation of function codes E31 and E32

(frequency detection).

Undervoltage detection signal [LV]

If the undervoltage protective function activates, i.e. when the main circuit DC voltage falls below the undervoltage detection level, an ON signal is output. The signal goes off when the voltage recovers and increases above the detection level. The ON signal is retained while the undervoltage protective function is activating.

Undervoltage detection level: 230V series: 200V, 460V series: 400V.

Torque polarity [B/D]

This function determines the torque polarity calculated in the inverter and outputs a signal indicating driving or braking torque. An OFF signal is output for driving torque; an ON signal is output for braking torque.

Torque limiting [TL]

When the torque limiting activates, the stall prevention function is automatically activated to change the output frequency. The torque limiting signal is output to lighten the load, and also used to display overload conditions on the monitor device. This ON signal is output during the current or torque is limited or power regeneration is prevented.

Auto-restarting [IPF]

Following a momentary power failure, this function reports the start of the restart mode, the occurrence of an automatic pull-in, and the completion of the recovery operation.

Following a momentary power failure, an ON signal is output when power is recovered and a synchronization

(pull-in) operation is performed. The signal goes off when the frequency (before power failure) is recovered.

For 0Hz restart at power recovery, no signal is output because synchronization ends when power is recovered.

The frequency is not recovered to the frequency before the power failure occurrence.

Overload early warning [OL1]

Before the motor stops by the trip operation of an electronic thermal O/L relay, this function outputs an ON signal when the load reaches the overload early warning level.

Either the electronic thermal O/L relay early warning or output current overload early warning can be selected.

For setting procedure, see “E33 Overload early warning

(operation selection)”, and "E34 Overload early warning

(operation level)."

Note: This function is effective for motor 1 only.

Keypad operation mode [KP]

An ON signal is output when operation command keys be used (i.e., 0 set in "F02 Operation") to issue operation and stop commands.

This signal is OFF when the function H30(Serial link) is set to communication side.

Inverter stopping [STOP]

This function outputs an inverted signal to Running

(RUN) to indicate zero speed. An ON signal is output when the DC injection brake function is operating.

Ready output [RDY]

This function outputs an ON signal when the inverter is ready to operate. The inverter is ready to operate when the main circuit and control circuit power is established and the inverter protective function is not activating.

About one second is required from power-on to ready for operation in normal condition.

Line/Inv changeover [SW88] [SW52-2] [SW52-1]

To perform switching operation between the line and the inverter, the sequence prepared in the inverter can be used to select and output signals for opening and closing the magnetic contactors connected to the inverter. As the operation is complex, refer to technical documentation for the

FRENIC5000G11S series when using this function.

As the sequence will operate automatically when SW88 or SW52-2 is selected, do not select when not using the sequence.

Motor 2 /Motor 1 [SWM2]

When a signal for switching to motor 2 is input from the terminal selected by terminals [X1] to [X9], this function selects and outputs the signal for switching the magnetic contactor for the motor. As this switching signal is not output during running including when the DC injection braking function is operating, a signal must be re-input after output stops.

Auxiliary terminal [AX]

When an operation (forward or reverse) command is entered, this function outputs an ON signal. When a stop command is entered, the signal goes off after inverter output stops. When a coast-to-stop command is entered and the inverter protective function operates, the signal goes off immediately.

Time-up signal for pattern operation [TU]

When the pattern operation stage changes, this function outputs a one-shot (100ms) ON signal to report a stage change.

Cycle completion signal for pattern operation [TO]

When the seven stages of a pattern operation are completed, this function outputs a one-shot (100 ms) ON signal to report the completion of all stages.

Stage No. indication for pattern operation [STG1] [STG2] [STG4]

During pattern operation, this function reports the stage

(operation process) being operated.

Pattern operation stage No.

Output terminal

STG1 STG2 STG4

Stage 1 ｏｎｏｆｆｏｆｆ

Stage 2 ｏｆｆｏｎｏｆｆ

Stage 3

Stage 4 ｏｎｏｆｆｏｎｏｆｆｏｆｆｏｎ

Stage 5 ｏｎｏｆｆｏｎ

Stage 6

Stage 7 ｏｆｆｏｎｏｎｏｎｏｎｏｎ

When pattern operation is not activated (i.e., no stage is selected), the terminals do not output a signal.

5-25

Alarm indication [AL1] [AL2] [AL4] [AL8]

This function reports the operating status of the inverter protective function.

Alarm detail

(inverter protective function)

Output terminal

AL1 AL2 AL4 AL8

Overcurrent, ground fault, fuse blown

Overvoltage

Undervoltage shortage, input phase failure

Motors 1 and 2 overload

Inverter overload

Heat sink overheating, inverter inside overheating

External alarm input, braking resistor overheating

Memory error, CPU error

on

off off off off

on

off off

on on

off off off off

on

off

on

off

on

off off

on on

off

on on on

off off off off

on

Keypad panel communication error, option communication error

on

off off

on

Option error

Output wiring error

RS-485 communication error

Overspeed, PG disconnection off

on

off

on

off off

on on on

off

on on

off

on on on

In normal operation terminals do not output a signal.

Fan operation signal [FAN]

When used with "H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF control," this function outputs a signal while the cooling fan is operating.

Auto-resetting [TRY]

When a value of 1 or larger is set to "H04 Retry operating," the signal is output while retry operation is activating when the inverter protective function is activated.

Universal DO [U-DO]

Assigning value "27" to a transistor output terminal renders the terminal a universal DO terminal.

This function enables ON/OFF through the RS-485 and

BUS option.

This function serves only to turn on and off the transistor output through communication and is not related to inverter operation.

Overheat early warning [OH]

This function outputs a early warning signal when heat sink temperature is (overheat detection level - 10℃) or higher.

Life expectancy detection signal [LIFE]

X

When either of data for the Life expectancy judgment of the function code:U09 to U11 reaches at the Life expectancy judgment level, the ON signal is output.

However, the inverter does not do alarm.

Moreover, the alarm output for any fault (30A, 30B,

30C ) does not operate.

Function code

Parts of

Life expectancy judgment

Life expectancy judgment level

U09 Capacitor in main circuit 85% or less of the initial value

U10 Electrolytic capacitor on PCB 61,000 hours

U11 Cooling fan 25,000 hours

U59 DC fan broken for stir internal unit up

[40HP or more is corresponded.]

DC fan is broken

In the following cases, normal life judgment of the capacitor in main circuit may not be able to be performed.

1. When a power is turned off during inverter operation.

2. When cooling fan ON/OFF control is operated.

( function code : H 06= 1)

3. When the power is supplied by the auxiliary input terminals (R0,T0).

4. When the option card is operated .

5. When RS-485 communication is operated .

6. When the power supply is turned off with digital input

(FWD, REV, X1-X9) of a control terminal being ON.

In the case of "3", "4", "5" and "6", life judgment is enabled by adjusting the function both code:U08 and

U09.


U08～U11, U59

2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2]

This function is same as Frequency detection [FDT1], the detection level of the output frequency and hysteresis width are determined by E36 and E32.

2nd OL level early warning [OL2]

This function outputs an ON signal when the output current exceeds “E37 OL2 LEVEL” for longer than “E35

OL TIMER”.

NOTE) This function is valid for both of Motor 1 and

Motor 2.

Terminal C1 off signal [C1OFF]

This function outputs an ON signal when the input current of terminal C1 is less than 2mA.

(When AIO option is connected, it can be detected the disconnection of C2 terminal.)

Synchronization completed by synchronous operation card [SY]

Speed agreement signal [DSAG]

PG error signal [PG-ABN]

X

The above functions are set for OPC-G11S-PG / PG2.


Torque limiting (Signal with delay) [TL2]

X

The turning on signal is output by continuing the limiting action(Torque limit operation, regeneration avoidance operation and overcurrent limiting operation) of 20ms or more.

Settings when shipped from the factory

Digital input

Terminal Y1

Terminal Y2

Terminal Y3

Terminal Y4

Terminal Y5

Setting at factory shipment

Set value

0

1

2

7

10

Description

Operating [RUN]

Frequency arrival [FAR]

Frequency detection [FDT]

Overload early warning [OL1]

Ready output [RDY]

E25 Y5 Ry operation mode

X

This function specifies whether to excite the Y5 relay at

“ON signal mode” or “OFF signal mode”.

E 2 5 Y 5 R Y M O D E

Set value Operation

0

1

At “OFF signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: OFF

At “ON signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: ON

At “OFF signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: ON

At “ON signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: OFF

X

When the set value is "1", contacts Y5A and Y5C are connected when the inverter control voltage is established (about one second after power on).

E30

FAR function signal (Hysteresis)

X

This function adjusts the detection width when the output frequency is the same as the set frequency (operating frequency). The detection width can be adjusted from 0 to

±10 Hz of the setting frequency.

E 3 0 F A R

H Y S T R

Setting range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

When the frequency is within the detection width, an ON signal can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5].

Output frequency

+Detection width

Frequency detection signal

(terminals

Y1 to Y5)

ON ON

Time

E31

E32

FDT1 function signal (Level)

FDT1 function signal (Hysteresis)

X

This function determines the operation (detection) level of the output frequency and hysteresis width for operation release. When the output frequency exceeds the set operation level, an ON signal can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5].

E 3 1 F D T 1 L E V E L

E 3 2 F D T H Y S T R

Setting range(Operation level) : G11S: 0 to 400 Hz

P11S: 0 to 120 Hz

(Hysteresis width) : 0.0 to 30.0 Hz

Output frequency

Hysteresis width

Set frequency

5-26

Frequency detection signal

(terminals

Y1 to Y5)

-Detection width

ON

Set frequency

+Detection width

-Detection width

Set frequency

Operation level

Release level

Time

E33

OL function signal (mode select)

X

Select one of the following two types of overload early warning: early warning by electronic thermal O/L relay function or early warning by output current.

E 3 3 O L W A R N I N G

Set value 0: Electronic thermal O/L relay

1: Output current

Set value

Function Description

0

Electronic thermal

O/L relay

Overload early warning by electronic thermal O/L relay (having inverse-time characteristics) to output current.

The operation selection and thermal time constant for the inverse-time characteristics are the same as those of the electronic thermal O/L relay for motor protection (F10 and F12).

1 Output current

An overload early warning is issued when output current exceeds the set current value for the set time.

The figure of OL2(E37) is refferred.

X

This function cannot be used when Motor 2 is selected.

E34

OL function signal (Level)

X

This function determines the operation level of the electronic thermal O/L relay or output current.

E 3 4 O L 1 L E V E L

Setting range G11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 200%)

P11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 150%)

The operation release level is 90% of the set value.

X

This function cannot be used when Motor 2 is selected.

E35

OL function signal (Timer)

E 3 5 O L 1 T I M E R

X

This function is used when 1 (output current) is set to

"E33 Overload early warning (operation selection)."

Setting range: 0.1 to 60.0 seconds

X

Set the time from when the operation level is attained until the overload early warning function is activated.

E36

FDT2 function (Level)

X

This function determines the operation (detection) level of output frequency for “2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2]”.

The hysteresis width for operation release is set by the function E32: FDT1 function signal (Hysteresis).

E 3 6 F D T 2 L E V E L

Setting range(Operation level) : G11S: 0 to 400 Hz

P11S: 0 to 120 Hz

E37 OL2 function (Level)

X

This function determines the operation level of the output current for “2nd OL level detection [OL2]”.

E 3 7 O L 2 L E V E L

Setting range G11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 200%)

P11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 150%)

The operation release level is 90% of the set value.

E37 OL2 LEVEL

(E34 OL1 LEVEL)

Output current

OL2 LEVEL x 90%

(OL1 LEVEL x 90% )

E35

OL TIMER

[OL2]

ＯＮ

Display coefficient A

Display coefficient B

E40

E41

X

These coefficients are conversion coefficients which are used to determine the load and line speed and the target value and feedback amount (process amount) of the PID controller displayed on the LED monitor.

E 4 0 C O E F A

E 4 1 C O E F B

Setting range

Display coefficient A:-999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00

Display coefficient B:-999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00

X

Load and line speed

Use the display coefficient A.

Displayed value = output frequency x (0.01 to 200.00)

Although the setting range is ±999.00, the effective value range of display data is 0.01 to 200.00.

Therefore, values smaller or larger than this range are limited to a minimum value of 0.01 or a maximum value of 200.00.

X

Target value and feedback amount of PID controller

Set the maximum value of display data in E40, "Display coefficient A," and the minimum value in E41, "Display coefficient B."

Displayed value = (target value or feedback amount) x (display coefficient A - B)+B

Displayed value

A

B

0%

100%

Target value or feedback amount

5-27

E43

E44

LED monitor (function)

LED monitor (display at stop mode)

X

The data during inverter operation, during stopping, at frequency setting, and at PID setting is displayed on the

LED.

X

Display during running and stopping

During running, the items selected in "E43 LED monitor

(display selection)," are displayed. In "E44 LED monitor

(display at stopping)," specify whether to display some items out of the set values or whether to display the same items as during running.

E 4 3 L E D M N T R

E 4 4 L E D M N T R 2

Value set to

E43

0

1

E44＝0 E44＝1

At stopping During running

At stopping

During running

Set frequency value

(Hz)

Output frequency

(before slip compensation) (Hz)

Set frequency value

(Hz)

Output frequency

(after slip compensation) (Hz)

Set frequency value (Hz)

Output current (A)

2

3

4

5

6

Output voltage (command value) (V)

Synchronous speed Synchronous speed (r/min) set value (r/min)

Line speed set Line speed (m/min.) value (m/min.)

7 Load speed set value (r/min)

Load speed (r/min)

8

9

Calculated torque value (%)

Output power (HP)

10 PID target value 1 (direct input from keypad panel)

11 PID target value 2 (input from "F02 Frequency 1")

12 PID feedback amount

Note: For the values 10 to 12 set to E43, the data is displayed only when selected in "H20 PID control

(operation selection)."

X

Display at frequency setting

When a set frequency is checked or changed by the keypad panel, the set value shown below is displayed.

Select the display item by using "E43 LED monitor

(display selection)." This display is not affected by "E44

LED monitor (display at stopping)."

Value set to

E43

0,1,2,3,4

5

6

7

8,9

10,11,12

Frequency setting

Set value of frequency (Hz)

Set value of synchronous speed (r/min)

Set value of line speed (m/min.)

Set value of load speed (r/min)



Note: For the values 10 to 12 set to E43, the data is displayed only when selected in "H20 PID control

(operation selection)."

E45 LCD monitor (function)

X

This function selects the item to be displayed on the LCD monitor in the operation mode.

E 4 5 L C D M N T R

Set value Display item

Operation status, rotating direction, operation guide

0

1 Output frequency (before slip compensation), output current, calculated torque value in bar graph

Set value: 0

During running When stopping

60.00

RUN

FWD

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

60.00

STOP

PRG

⇒PRG MENU

F/D

⇒LED SHIFT

Set value: 1

60.00

Hz

A

%

Fout/Iout/TRQ

Full-scale value of bar graph

Display item

Output frequency

Full-scale

Maximum frequency

Output current 200% of inverter rated value

Calculated torque value 200% of motor rated value

Note: The scale cannot be adjusted.

E46

Language

X

This function selects the language for data display on the

LCD monitor.

E 4 6 L A N G U A G E

Set value Language displayed

Set value Language displayed

0 Japanese 3 French

1 English 4 Spanish

2 German 5 Italian

Note: English language is used for all LCD screens in this manual. For other languages, refer to the relevant instruction manual.

E47

LCD monitor (contrast)

X

This function adjusts the LCD contrast. Increase the set value to raise contrast and decrease to lower contrast.

E 4 7 C O N T R A S T

Set value

Screen

0,1,2

• • • • • • 8,9,10

Low High

5-28

C01

C02

C03

Jump frequency 1



C

C 0 1 J U M P H z 1

C 0 2 J U M P H z 2

C 0 3 J U M P H z 3

Setting range

G11S : 0 to 400Hz

P11S : 0 to 120Hz

In 1Hz steps (min.)

：

Control Functions of Frequency

C04 Jump frequency (Hysteresis)

X

This function makes the set frequency jump so that the inverter's output frequency does not match the mechanical resonance point of the load.

X

Up to three jump points can be set.

X

This function is ineffective when jump frequencies 1 to 3 are set to 0Hz.

X

A jump does not occur during acceleration or deceleration.

When a jump frequency setting range overlaps another range, both ranges are added to determine the actual jump area.

Internal set frequency (Hz)

C05

C19

Actual jump width

Jump frequency width

C 0 5 M U L T I H z - 1

C 0 6 M U L T I H z - 2

Jump frequency 2

Jump frequency 1

Multistep frequency 1

Multistep frequency 15

Set frequency (Hz)

X

Multistep frequencies 1 to 15 can be switched by turning on and off terminal functions SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8.

(See E01 to E09 for terminal function definitions.)

X

OFF input is assumed for any undefined terminal of SS1,

SS2, SS4, and SS8.

C 0 4 J U M P H Y S T R

C 0 7 M U L T I H z - 3

C 0 8 M U L T I H z - 4


E01 to E09

(Set value:0 to 3

)

Setting range

0 to 30Hz

In 1Hz steps (min.)

To avoid the resonance of the motor driving frequency to the peculiar vibration frequency of the machine, the jump frequency band can be set to the output frequency up to three point.

X

During accelerating, an internal set frequency is kept constant by the lower frequency of the jump frequency band when a set frequency enters the jump frequency band. This means that the output frequency is kept constant according to an internal set frequency.

When a set frequency exceeds the upper bound of the jump frequency band, an internal set frequency reaches the value of a set frequency. The output frequency accelerates up to a set frequency while passing the jump frequency band according to the acceleration time at this time.

C 0 9 M U L T I H z - 5

C 1 0 M U L T I H z - 6

C 1 1 M U L T I H z - 7

C 1 2 M U L T I H z - 8

C 1 3 M U L T I H z - 9

C 1 4 M U L T I H z 1 0

C 1 5 M U L T I H z 1 1

C 1 6 M U L T I H z 1 2

C 1 7 M U L T I H z 1 3

C 1 8 M U L T I H z 1 4

C 1 9 M U L T I H z 1 5

Setting range

G11S: 0.00 to 400.00Hz

P11S: 0.00 to 120.00Hz

In 0.01Hz steps (min.)

During decelerating, it has a relation opposite to accelerating. Refer to figure below.

X

When two jump frequency bands or more come in succession mutually, the lowest and highest frequency become the lower bound and the upper bound frequency of an actual jump frequency band respectively among them. Refer to upper right figure.

Internal set frequency (Hz)

Output frequency

(Hz)

C06

C07

C08

C09

C10

C11

C12

C13

C14

C15

C16

C17

C18

C19

C05




FWD-P24

SS1-P24

Jump frequency 3

Jump frequency 1

Jump frequency 2

SS2-P24

SS4-P24

Set frequency (Hz)

5-29

SS8-P24

ON

ON

ON ON

ON

ON

ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON

ON ON

ON

C20 JOG frequency

X

This function sets the frequency for jogging operation of motor, which is different from the normal operation.

C 2 0 J

Setting range G11S : 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

P11S : 0.00 to 120.00 Hz

X

Starting with the jogging frequency is combined with jogging select signal input from the keypad panel or control terminal. For details, see the explanations of

"E01 Terminal X1" to "E09 Terminal X9."

C21 Pattern operation (mode select)

X

Pattern operation is an automatic operation according to preset operation time, direction of rotation, acceleration and deceleration time, and frequency.

When using this function, set 10 (pattern operation) to

"F01 Frequency setting."

The following operation patterns can be selected.

C 2 1 P A T T E R N

F01, C30

(Set value:10)

Set value

0

1

2

Set value:0

Operation pattern

Perform a pattern operation cycle, then stop operation.

Perform pattern operation repeatedly. Stop operation using a stop command.

Perform a pattern operation cycle, then continue operation with the last frequency set.

End of a cycle

Forward

FWD

Output frequency

0

Reverse

Time

C22

C28

Pattern operation (stage 1)

Pattern operation (stage 7)

X

Seven stages are operated in order (of function codes) according to the values set in "C22 Pattern operation

(stage 1)" to "C28 Pattern operation (stage 7)." Each function sets the operation time and the rotating direction for each stage and assigns set values of the acceleration and deceleration time.

C 2 2 S T A G E 1

C 2 3 S T A G E 2

C 2 4 S T A G E 3

C 2 5 S T A G E 4

C 2 6 S T A G E 5

C 2 7 S T A G E 6

C 2 8 S T A G E 7

Set or assign item

Operation time

0．00 to 6000s

Rotation direction

Acceleration

and deceleration time

Value range

F: Forward (counterclockwise)

R: Reverse (clockwise)

1: Acceleration time 1 (F07), deceleration time 1 (F08)

2: Acceleration time 2 (E10), deceleration time 2 (E11)



Note: The operation time is represented by the three most significant digits, hence, can be set with only three high-order digits.

X Setting example

100 F 3

Acceleration and deceleration time (code): 3

Motor rotating direction:

Forward (counterclockwise)

Set value:1

Forward

Output frequency

0

Reverse

FWD

End of a cycle

Time

Operation time: 100s

Set value:2

Forward

Output frequency

0

Reverse

FWD

End of a cycle

Time

Set the operation time to 0.00 for stages not used, which are skipped in operation.

With regard to the set frequency value, the multistep frequency function is assigned as listed in the table below.

Set frequencies to "C05 Multistep frequency 1," to "C11

Multistep frequency 7."

Stage No.

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Stage 4

Stage 5

Stage 6

Stage 7

Operation frequency to be set

Multistep frequency 1 (C05)







5-30

X

Pattern operation setting example

Function Set value Operation frequency to be set

C21 (operation selection)

C22 (stage 1)

C23 (stage 2)

C24 (stage 3)

C25 (stage 4)

C26 (stage 5)

C27 (stage 6)

C28 (stage 7)

1

72.0F4

35.0F2

-

60.0F2 Multistep frequency 1 (C05)

100F1 Multistep frequency 2 (C06)

65.5R4 Multistep frequency 3 (C07)

55.0R3 Multistep frequency 4 (C08)

50.0F2 Multistep frequency 5 (C09)



The following diagram shows this operation.

Forward direction

Multistep

Multistep frequency 2 frequency 1

(Stage 1)

Multistep frequency 6


ACC4

FWD

ACC1

DEC4

ACC2

DEC2


(Stage 7)

DEC1

ACC2

ACC4

ACC3 DEC2



Reverse direction

60.0S

100S 65.5S 55.0S 50.0S 72.0S 35.0S

Time

C30

Frequency command 2

X

This function selects the frequency setting method.


E01 to E09

(Set value:11)

F01

C 3 0 F R E Q C M D 2

0 : Setting by keypad panel operation

1 : Setting by voltage input (terminal [12 ](0 to +10V))

2 : Inactive

3 : Inactive

4 : Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal [12] (-10 to +10V))

5 : Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal [12] +

[V1](Option) (-10 to +10V))

6 : Inverse mode operation (terminal [12] (+10V to 0 ))

7 : Inactive

8 : Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 1 (initial value = 0)

(terminals [UP] and [DOWN])

9 : Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 2 (initial value

=last final value) (terminals [UP] and [DOWN])

See the function explanation of E01 to E09 for details.

10 : Setting by pattern operation

See the function explanation C21 to C28 for details.

11 : Setting by digital input or pulse train

* Optional. For details, see the instruction manual on options.

Set value

:16

0.1S

Set value

:17

Output signals from terminals Y1 to Y5

0.1S

X

Running and stopping are controlled by pressing the

FWD

and keys and by opening and closing the control terminals. starts operation. Pressing the key pauses stage advance. Pressing the key again restarts operation from the stop point according to the stages. If an alarm stop occurs, press the key to release operation of the inverter protective function, then press the

FWD

key to restart stage advance.

If required to start operation from the first stage "C22

Pattern operation (stage 1)," enter a stop command and press the key. the protective function, then press the key again.

Notes:

1. The direction of rotation cannot be reversed by a command issued from the key on the keypad panel or terminal [REV]. Any reverse rotation commands entered are canceled. Select forward or reverse rotation by the data in each stage. When the control terminals are used for operation, the self-hold function of operation command also does not work. Select an alternate type switch when using.

2. At the end of a cycle, the motor decelerates-to-stop according to the value set to "F08 Deceleration time 1."

5-31

C31

Bias (terminal[12])

C32 Gain (terminal[12])

X

This function sets the Gain and Bias of the analog input

(terminals [12] ).

C 3 1 B I A S 1 2

C 3 2 G A I N 1 2

The setting range :

BIAS: -100 to +100%

GAIN:0.0 to 200%

Terminal

12

Gain Bias

Reference voltage

Output value of Gain 12

200%

+10V

100%

50%

-10 0 +10[V]

-10V

Analog input voltage

[terminal 12]

X

An set value too large delays control response though stabilizing control. A set value too small speeds up control response but renders control unstable.

If the optimum value is not known, change the setting when control is unstable or response is delayed.

Note:

The set value is commonly applied to terminals 12 and C1.

For input of PID feedback amount, the PID control feedback filter (set in H25) is used.

Output value of Bias 12

+10V

(+100%)

Bias setting

(when positive)

-10 0 +10[V]

Output value of Gain 12

Bias setting

(when negative)

-10V

(-100%)

C33 Analog setting signal filter

X

Analog signals input from control terminal 12 or C1 may contain noise, which renders control unstable. This function adjusts the time constant of the input filter to remove the effects of noise.

C 3 3 R E F F I L T E R


5-32

P01

Motor 1 (P: Motor Parameters)

Number of motor 1 poles

X

This function sets the number of poles of motor 1 to be driven. If this setting is not made, an incorrect motor speed (synchronous speed) is displayed on the LED.

P 0 1 M 1 P O L E S

Set values: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14

P02

Motor 1 (capacity)

X

The nominal applied motor capacity is set at the factory.

The setting should be changed when driving a motor with a different capacity.

P 0 2 M

Set value for models with nominal applied motor of 30HP or less

: 0.01 to 60HP

Models with nominal applied motor of 40HP or more

: 0.01 to 800HP

X

Set the nominal applied motor capacity listed in 9-1,

"Standard Specifications." Also set a value in the range from two ranks lower to one rank higher than the nominal applied motor capacity. When a value outside this range is set, accurate control cannot be guaranteed. If a value between two nominal applied motor capacities is set, data for the lower capacity is automatically written for related function data.

X

When the setting of this function is changed, the values of the following related functions are automatically set to data of the FUJI 3-phase standard motor.

-- P03 Motor 1 (rated current)

-- P06 Motor 1 (no-load current)

-- P07 Motor 1 (% R1)

-- P08 Motor 1 (% X1)

Note:

The set values for the FUJI 3-phase standard motor are

230V, 50Hz, 4 poles for the 230V series; 460V, 50Hz, 4

Set value

Operation

0 Inactive

1 Measure the primary resistance (%R1) of the motor and leakage reactance (%X) of the base frequency when the motor is stopping and automatically write both values in P07 and P08.

2 Measure the primary resistance (%R1) of the motor and leakage reactance (%X) of the base frequency when the motor is stopping, measure the no-load current (lo) when the motor is running, and automatically write these values in P06, P07, and P08.

Put the motor into the state unit separating from the machine for the tuning of the no-load current.

In the state that the load is connected, cannot the tuning correctly. Execute the auto tuning of set value

“1" after obtaining the test report etc. from the motor manufactures when not making it in the state of the motor unit, and setting P06

(no-load current) beforehand.

X

Perform auto tuning when data written beforehand in

"P06 No-load current," "P07 %R1," and "P08 %X," differs from actual motor data. Typical cases are listed below. motor is used and accurate data is required for close when cable between the inverter and the motor is too long or when a reactor is connected.

・ When %R1 or %X is unknown as when a non-standard or special motor is used.

Auto tuning improves control and calculation accuracy.

・

When a motor other than the FUJI standard 3-phase control.

・

When output-side impedance cannot be ignored as poles for the 460V series.

P03

Motor 1 (rated current)

X

This function sets the rated current value of motor 1.

P 0 3 M 1 - I r

Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000A

P04

Motor 1 (Tuning)

X

This function measures and automatically writes motor data.

Tuning procedure

1. Adjust the voltage and frequency according to motor characteristics. Adjust functions "F03 Maximum output frequency," "F04 Base frequency," "F05 Rated voltage," and "F06 Maximum output voltage."

2. Enter untunable motor constants first. Set functions

"P02 Capacity," "P03 Rated current," and "P06 No-load current," (input of no-load current not required when

P04=2, for running the motor at tuning, is selected).

P 0 4 M 1 T U N 1

3. When tuning the no-load current, beware of motor rotation.

4. Set 1 (motor stop) or 2 (motor rotation) to function "P04

FUNC

Auto tuning." Press the key to write the set value tuning simultaneously.

5. Tuning takes several seconds to several tens of seconds

(when 2 is set. As the motor accelerates up to half the base frequency according to acceleration time, is tuned for the no-load current, and decelerates according to the deceleration time, the total tuning time varies depending on set acceleration and deceleration times.)

7. End of procedure.

5-33

Note1:

If REMOTE operation(F02: 1) is selected, operation signal is given from terminal [FWD] or [REV].

Note2:

Use function "A13 Motor 2 (auto tuning)," to tune motor 2. In this case, set values described in 1 and 2 above are for the function (A01 - ) of motor 2.

WARNING

When the auto tuning value is set to 2, the motor rotates at a maximum of half the base frequency. Beware of motor rotation.

as injury may result.

P05 Motor 1 (On-line Tuning)

X

Long-time operation affects motor temperature and motor speed. Online tuning minimizes speed changes when motor temperature changes.

X

Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this function.

P 0 5 M 1 T U N 2

Set value Operation

0 Inactive

1 Active

P06 Motor 1 (no-load current)

X

This function sets the no-load current (exciting current) of motor 1.

P 0 6

M 1 －

Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000A

P07

P08

Motor 1 (%R1 setting)

Motor 1 (%X setting)

X

Write this data when using a motor other than the FUJI standard 3-phase motor and when the motor constant and the impedance between the inverter and motor are known.

P09

Slip compensation control

X

Changes in load torque affect motor slippage, thus causing variations in motor speed. The slip compensation control adds a frequency (proportional to motor torque) to the inverter output frequency to minimize variations in motor speed due to torque changes.

P 0 9 S L I P C O M P 1

X


Set value: 0.00 to 15.00Hz

X

Calculate the amount of slip compensation using the following formula:

Slip compenssat ion amount

＝Base frequency ×

Slippage［r /min］

［Hz］

Synchronou s speed［r/mi n］

Slippage = Synchronous speed - Rated speed

P 0 7

M 1 － % R 1

P 0 8

M 1 －

X

X

Calculate %R1 using the following formula:

%R1

=

R1＋Cable R

V/

( )

× 100［%］

R1 : Primary coil resistance value of the motor [

Ω]

Cable R : Output-side cable resistance value [

Ω]

V : Rated voltage [V] Ｉ: Motor rated current [A]

X

Calculate %X using the following formula:

%X

=

X1＋X2・XM/

V/

(

(

X2＋XM

3 ・I

)

)

+ Cable X

× 100［%］

X1 : Primary leakage reactance of the motor [

Ω]

X2 : Secondary leakage reactance (converted to a primary value)of the motor [

Ω]

XM : Exciting reactance of the motor [

Ω]

Cable X : Output-side cable reactance [

Ω]

V : Rated voltage [V] I : Motor rated current[A]

Note:

For reactance, use a value in the data written in "F04

Base frequency 1."

X

When connecting a reactor or filter to the output circuit, add its value. Use value 0 for cable values that can be ignored.

5-34

High Performance functions (H:High Performance function)

H03 Data initializing

X

This function returns all function data changed by the customer to the factory setting data. (initialization).

W hen retry succeeded

Occurrence Extinction

H 0 3 D A T A I N I T

Alarm

Set value 0： Disabled.

1： Initializing data.

X

∧ values of all functions are initialized. The set value in

Automatic release command of protective function

W aiting time

(H05)

Output frequency

H03 automatically returns to 0 following the end of initialization.

H04

H05

Auto-reset(Times)

Auto-reset (Reset interval)

X

When the inverter protective function which invokes the retry operation is activated, this function releases operation of the protective function and restarts operation without issuing an alarm or terminating output.

Output signals terminals

Y1 to Y5

ON

0.1S

Restart

5min. after constant speed

Time

RESET the times of auto-reset

H 0 4 A U T O - R E S E T

H 0 5 R E S E T I N T

Set the protective function release count and waiting time from its operation startup to release.

Setting range (Count) : 0, 1 to 10

(Waiting time) : 2 to 20 seconds

To not use the retry function, set 0 to "H04 Retry (count)."

X

Inverter protective functions that can invoke retry function.

OC1,OC2,OC3

: Overcurrent

OV1,OV2,OV3

: Overvoltage dBH

: Braking resistor overheating

OL1

: Motor 1 overload

OH1

: Heat sink overheating

OH3

: Inverter inside overheating

OL2

: Motor 2 overload

OLU

: Inverter overload

X

When the value of "H04 Retry (count)," is set from 1 to

10, an inverter run command is immediately entered following the wait time set in H05, "Retry (wait time)," and the startup of the retry operation. If the cause of the alarm has been removed at this time, the inverter starts without switching to alarm mode. If the cause of the alarm still remains, the protective function is reactivated according to the wait time set in "H05 Retry

(waiting time)." This operation is repeated until the cause of the alarm is removed. The restart operation switches to alarm mode when the retry count exceeds the value set in "H04 Retry (count)."

The operation of the retry function can be monitored from terminals Y1 to Y5.

When the retry function is selected,

WARNING

operation automatically restarts depending on the cause of the trip stop. (The machine should be designed to ensure safety during a restart)

as accident may result.

retry failed

Alarm

Automatic release command of protective function

Output frequency

Output signals terminals

Y1 to Y5

H06

Occurrence

0.1S

H05:

W ait time

First

0.1S

H05:

W ait time

ON

Second

Fan stop operation

Extinction

0.1S

Alarm reset

Retry end

Count set in

H04 (count)

X

This function specifies whether cooling fan ON/OFF control is automatic. While power is applied to the inverter, the automatic fan control detects the temperature of the cooling fan in the inverter and turns the fan on or off.

When this control is not selected, the cooling fan rotates continually.

H 0 6 F A N S T O P

Set value 0: ON/OFF control disabled.

1: ON/OFF control enabled.

The cooling fan operating status can be monitored from terminals Y1 to Y5.

5-35

H07 ACC/DEC （Mode select） pattern

X

This function selects the acceleration and deceleration pattern.

H 0 7 A C C P T N

Set value 0: Inactive (linear acceleration and deceleration)

1: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (mild)

2: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (*)

3: Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration


U02 to U05

* The S-shape range is set by the function: U02 to U05 when the set value "2" is selected.

The detail is referred to the function: U02 to U05.

[S-shape acceleration and deceleration]

This pattern reduces shock by mitigating output frequency changes at the beginning/end of acceleration and deceleration.

Output frequency f[Hz]

Mild S-shape ern

Arbitrary S-shape

α

Output frequency

Acceleration time


Set frequency

Base frequency

Deceleration time

0 t[sec]

H08

Rev. phase sequence lock

X

When accidental reversing is expected to cause a malfunction, this function can be set to prevent reversal.

H 0 8 R E V L O C K


1: Active

When reversible operation with polarity(set value: "4" or

"5") is selected in frequency command: F01, C30, the inverter operates as follows.

Operation command

0V to 10V input -10V to 0V input

Short FWD-CM terminals or

: ON

The inverter operates.

Short REV-CM The frequency display terminals or

: ON is "0.00" Hz.

The frequency display is "0.00" Hz.

The inverter operates.

This function prevents a reversing operation resulting from a connection between the REV and P24 terminals, inadvertent activation of the key, or negative analog input from terminal 12 or V1. During this function is operating, "0.00Hz" is displayed on the LED monitor.

This function cannot be prevented against H18: Torque control function. It may be reverse because of the torque signal and load.

α

0

t[s]

βacc βacc βdec βdec

<Pattern constants>

When 1 is selected in H07

(mild S-shape pattern)

When 2 is selected in H07

(arbitrary S-shape pattern)

Range of

S-shape(

α)

Time for

S-shape at acceleration

(

β acc)

Time for

S-shape at deceleration

(

β dec)

0.05 x max. output freq. (Hz)

0.10 x acceleration time (s)

0.10 x deceleration time (s)

(U02 to U05) x max. output freq. (Hz)

(U02, U03) x2 x acceleration time (s)

U04, U05 x2 x deceleration time (s)

∗

When acceleration and deceleration times are very long or short, acceleration and deceleration are rendered linear.

It may be switched the acceleration and deceleration time during constant speed or stopping by the function

"acceleration and deceleration time selection"(E01 to

E09: 4, 5).

The signal may be ignored switched during S-shape at acceleration.

The linear deceleration time is corresponded if switched during S-shape at deceleration.

It may be switched to the S-shape operation if output frequency is reached to the setting frequency or change to acceleration control.

[ Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration ]

This function is used to minimize motor acceleration and deceleration times in the range that includes a constant-output range.

5-36

H09

Start mode

This function smoothly starts the motor which is coasting after a momentary power failure or after the motor has been subject to external force, without stopping motor.

At startup, this function detects the motor speed and outputs the corresponding frequency, thereby enabling a shock-free motor startup. Although the normal startup method is used, when the coasting speed of the motor is

120 Hz or more as an inverter frequency, when the value set to "F03 Maximum frequency," exceeds the value set to

"F15 Frequency limiter (upper limit)." and when the coasting speed is less than 5 Hz as an inverter frequency.

H 0 9 S T A R T M O D E

Set value

Set value STM

0,1,2

Restart after a momentary power failure or

Line-to-inverter switching

Other operation

0

1

OFF / not selected

Inactive

(normal starting)

Active

(smoothly starting)

Inactive

2 any value ON

Active

Active

STM: Start characteristics selection signal(E01 to E09: 26)

NOTE:

-1: Automatically restart when overcurrent or overvoltage is detected during smoothly starts.

-2: The coasting speed is used 100 Hz or less as an inverter frequency.

-3: When H09:2 or STM:ON, it needs the time more than normal start even the motor is STOP because the motor speed is detected on ALL situation. And it may be rotated the motor when the load is too small.

-4: Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this function.

-5: When the used motor slippage is too differ from FUJI motor, the "Slip compensation control (P09, A18)" should be set. The characteristics may not be satisfied.

X

When the operation above is to be problem, this function is not used (inactive).

X

This function may not be satisfied the characteristics because of the load condition, motor constant, operating frequency, coasting speed, wire length, momentary power failure time or external factor.

0.1 s or 0.2 s or

P24 longer longer

STM

ON

Time

FWD

ON

Output frequency

(motor speed)

Time

Speed search

Acceleration

In this section, the output voltage is gradually increased in steps to minimize shock.

Note: The dotted-dashed line indicates motor speed.

5-37

H10 Energy-saving operation

X

When the output frequency is fixed (constant-speed operation) at light loads and except for”0.0” is set to F09,

"Torque boost 1," this function automatically reduces the output voltage, while minimizing the product (power) of voltage and current.

X


X

The energy-saving operation does not be operated when set below.

- Under Torque control

- Selected the Automatic torque boost

- Selected the Torque vector control

- Under PG vector control

H 1 0 E N E R G Y S A V


1: Active

Note:

-Use this function for square law reduction torque loads

(e.g., fans, pumps). When used for a constant-torque load or rapidly changing load, this function causes a delay in control response.

-The energy-saving operation automatically stops during acceleration and deceleration and when the torque limiting function is activated.

H11 DEC mode

X

This function selects the inverter stopping method when a stop command is entered.

H 1 1 D E C M O D E

Set value 0: Deceleration-to-stop based on data set to "H07

Non-linear acceleration and deceleration"

1: Coasting-to-stop

Note:

This function is effective only when a stop command is entered and, therefore, is ineffective when the motor is stopped by lowering the set frequency.

H12 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting

X

An overcurrent trip generally occurs when current flows above the inverter protective level following a rapid change in motor load. The instantaneous overcurrent limiting function controls inverter output and prohibits the flow of a current exceeding the protective level even when the load changes.

X

As the operation level of the instantaneous overcurrent limiting function cannot be adjusted, the torque limiting function must be used.

WARNING

As motor generation torque may be reduced when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is applied, set this function to be inactive for equipment such as elevators, which are adversely affected by reduced motor generation torque, in which case an overcurrent trip occurs when the current flow exceeds the inverter protective level. A mechanical brake should be used to ensure safety.


H 1 2 I N S T C L


1: Active

H13

Auto-restart (Restart time)

X

Instantaneous switching to another power line (when the power of an operating motor is cut off or power failure occurs) creates a large phase difference between the line voltage and the voltage remaining in the motor, which may cause electrical or mechanical failure. To rapidly switch power lines, write the remaining voltage attenuation time to wait for the voltage remaining in the motor to attenuate. This function operates at restart after a momentary power failure.

H 1 3 R E S T A R T T


X

When the momentary power failure time is shorter than the wait time value, a restart occurs following the wait time. When the power failure time is longer than the wait time value, a restart occurs when the inverter is ready to operate (after about 0.2 to 0.5 second).

H14

Auto-restart (Freq. fall rate)

X

This function determines the reduction rate of the output frequency for synchronizing the inverter output frequency and the motor speed. This function is also used to reduce the frequency and thereby prevent stalling under a heavy load during normal operation.

H 1 4 F A L L R A T E

Setting range: 0.00, 0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s

X

When 0.00 is set, the frequency is reduced according to the set deceleration time.

Note:

A too large frequency reduction rate is may temporarily increase the regeneration energy from the load and invoke the overvoltage protective function. Conversely, a rate that is too small extends the operation time of the current limiting function and may invoke the inverter overload protective function.

Auto-restart (Holding DC voltage)

H15

X

This function is for when 2 (deceleration-to-stop at power failure) or 3 (operation continuation) is set to "F14

Restart after momentary power failure (operation selection)." Either function starts a control operation if the main circuit DC voltage drops below the set operation continuation level.

H 1 5 H O L D V

Setting range 230 V series: 200 to 300V

460 V series: 400 to 600V

X

When power supply voltage to the inverter is high, control can be stabilized even under an excessive load by raising the operation continuation level. However, when the level is too high, this function activates during normal operation and causes unexpected motion. Please contact Fuji electric when changing the initial value.

H16

Auto-restart (OPR command selfhold time)

X

As the power to an external operation circuit (relay sequence) and the main power to the inverter is generally cut off at a power failure, the operation command issued to the inverter is also cut off. This function sets the time an operation command is to be held in the inverter. If a power failure lasts beyond the self-hold time, power-off is assumed, automatic restart mode is released, and the inverter starts operation at normal mode when power is applied again. (This time can be considered the allowable power failure time.)

H 1 6 S E L F H O L D T

Setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 seconds, 999

When "999" is set, an operation command is held (i.e., considered a momentary power failure) while control power in the inverter is being established or until the main circuit

DC voltage is about 100Vdc.

5-38

H18 Torque control

X

This function controls motor torque according to a command value.

H 1 8

T R Q C T R L


E01toE09

(Set value: 23)

Set value

0

1

2

Operation

Inactive (Operation by frequency command)

Torque control active

0 to +10V analog voltage input to terminal 12 and the direction of rotation (FWD or REV) is used for the torque command value. 0 is used for 0 to -10V.

Torque control active

-10 to +10V analog voltage input to terminal

12 and the direction of rotation (FWD or

REV) is used for the torque command value.

T o rq u e c o n tro l b lo c k d ia g ra m

V o lta g e a t te rm in a l 1 2 x

T o rq u e c o m m a n d va lu e

T o rq u e lim ita tio n

+

-

R e g u la to r

O u tp u t fre q u e n c y

F o rw a rd c o m m a n d

R e v e rs e c o m m a n d

D e te c te d to rq u e c u rre n t

The torque command value is +200% when the voltage at terminal 12 is +10V and is -200% when the voltage is -10V.

X


X

In torque control, the torque command value and motor load determine the speed and direction of rotation.

X

When the torque is controlled, the upper limit of frequency refers to the minimum value among the maximum frequency , the frequency limiter (upper limiter) value, and 120 Hz. Maintain the frequency at least one-tenth of the base frequency because torque control performance deteriorates at lower frequencies.

X

If the operation command goes off during a torque control operation, the operation is switched to speed control and the motor decelerates-to-stop. At this time, the torque control function does not operate.

X

This function cannot be used when the motor 2 is selected.

X

This function cannot be used for FRN-P11S.

WARNING

The malfunction may be occurred when the set torque is mistaken. (up to upper frequency, maximum frequency or 120Hz)


H19 Active drive

X

This function automatically extends accelerating time against acceleration operation of 60 seconds or longer to prevent an inverter trip resulting from a temperature rise in inverter due to overcurrent.

H 1 9 A U T R E D


1: Active

(When the active drive function is activated, the acceleration time is three times the selected time.)

H20

H25

PID control (Mode select)

PID control(Feedback filter)

X

PID control detects the amount of control (feedback amount) from a sensor of the control target, then compares it with the target value (e.g., reference temperature). If the values differ, this function performs a control to eliminate the deviation. In other words, this control matches the feedback amount with the target value.

This function can be used for flow control, pressure control, temperature control, and other process controls.

Target value

+

-

P

+

+ +

Drive section

Control target

I

D

Feedback amount

X

Forward or reverse operations can be selected for PID controller output. This enables motor revolutions to be faster or lower according to PID controller output

X


H 2 0 P I D M O D E

Set value 0: No operation

1: Forward operation

2: Reverse operation

Inverter output frequency

Maximum frequency

Fo rw ard tio n op era ope

Rev ratio n

0

0%

PID output

100%

X

The target value can be entered using F01, "Frequency setting 1," or directly from the keypad panel. Select any terminal of Terminals X1 (E01) to X9 (E09) and set value

11 (frequency setting switching).

For entry from F01, "Frequency setting 1," input an OFF signal to the selected terminal. For direct entry from the keypad panel, turn on the selected terminal.

X

For the target value and feedback amount, the process amount can be displayed according to the values set in

E40, "Display coefficient A," and E41, "Display coefficient B."

Display

Display coefficient A

H21

PID control (Feedback signal)

This function selects the feedback amount input terminal and electrical specifications of the terminal. Select a value from the table below according to sensor specifications.

H 2 1 F B S I G N A L

Set value Descriptions

0 Control terminal 12, forward operation (0 to

10V voltage input)

1

2

3

Control terminal C1, forward operation (4 to

20mA current input)

Control terminal 12, reverse operation (10 to 0V voltage input)

Control terminal C1, reverse operation (20 to 4mA current input)

Feedback amount

100%

Fo rw ard

op era tio n ope ratio erse n

0%

0V 10V

4mA

Input

20mA

Only positive values can be input for this feedback amount of PID control. Negative values (e.g., 0 to -10V, -10 to 0V) cannot be input, thereby the function cannot be used for a reverse operation by an analog signal.

Display coefficient B

0% 100%

Target value or feedback amount

5-39

H22

H23

PID control (P-gain)

PID control (I-gain)

H24

PID control (D-gain)

X

These functions are not generally used alone but are combined like P control, PI control, PD control, and PID control.

X

P operation

Operation using an operation amount (output frequency) proportional to deviation is called P operation, which outputs an operation amount proportional to deviation, though it cannot eliminate deviation alone.

Deviation

X

D operation

An operation where the operation amount (output frequency) is proportional to the deviation differential is called a D operation, which outputs an operation amount as the deviation differential and, therefore, is capable of responding to sudden changes.

Time

Time

Operation amount

H 2 2 P - G A I N

Setting range: 0.01 to 10.0 times

P (gain) is the parameter that determines the response level for the deviation of P operation. Although an increase in gain speeds up response, an excessive gain causes vibration, and a decrease in gain delays response.

The value "1" is the P(gain) that is when the maximum frequency 100% at deviation 100%.

Response

Time

X

I operation

An operation where the change speed of the operation amount (output frequency) is proportional to the deviation is called an I operation. An I operation outputs an operation amount as the integral of deviation and, therefore, has the effect of matching the control amount (feedback amount) to the target value (e.g., set frequency), though it deteriorates response for significant changes in deviation.

Time

H 2 3 I - G

Setting range: 0.0 (Inactive), 0.1 to 3600 seconds

"H23 I-gain" is used as a parameter to determine the effect of I operation. A longer integration time delays response and weakens resistance to external elements. A shorter integration time speeds up response, but an integration time that is too short causes vibration.

5-40

H 2 4 D - G A I N

Setting range: 0.00 (Inactive), 0.01 to 10.0 seconds

"H24 D-gain" is used as a parameter to determine the effect of a D operation. A longer differentiation time causes vibration by P operation quickly attenuating at the occurrence of deviation. Excessive differentiation time could cause vibration. Shortening the differentiation time reduces attenuation at the occurrence of deviation.

X

PI control

P operation alone does not remove deviation completely.

P + I control (where I operation is added to P operation) is normally used to remove the remaining deviation. PI control always operates to eliminate deviation even when the target value is changed or there is a constant disturbance. When I operation is strengthened, however, the response for rapidly changing deviation deteriorates. P operation can also be used individually for loads containing an integral element.

X

PD control

If deviation occurs under PD control, an operation amount larger than that of D operation alone occurs rapidly and prevents deviation from expanding. For a small deviation, P operation is restricted. When the load contains an integral element, P operation alone may allow responses to vibrate due to the effect of the integral element, in which case PD control is used to attenuate the vibration of P operation and stabilize responses. In other words, this control is applied to loads in processes without a braking function.

X

PID control

PID control combines the P operation, the I operation which removes deviation, and the D operation which suppresses vibration. This control achieves deviation-free, accurate, and stable responses.

X

Adjusting PID set value

Adjust the PID value while monitoring the response waveform on an oscilloscope or other instrument if possible. Proceed as follows:

-Increase the value of "H22 P-gain" without generating vibration.

- Decrease the value of "H23 I-gain" without generating vibration.

- Increase the value of "H24 D-gain" without generating vibration.

-To suppress vibration with a frequency roughly equivalent to the value "H24 D-gain," decrease the value of H24. If there is residual vibration with 0.0, decrease the value of

"H22 P-gain."

Before adjustment

Internal resistance of

PTC thermistor

Rp2

After adjustment

Rp1

Time

H25

PID control (Feedback filter)

X

This filter is for feedback signal input from terminal [12] or

[C1]. This filter stabilizes operation of the PID control system. A set value that is too large, however, deteriorates response.

H 2 5 F B F I L T E R


H26

PTC thermistor (Mode select)

X

Set this function active when the motor has a PTC thermistor for overheat protection

H 2 6 P T C M O D E


1: Active

X

Connect the PTC thermistor as shown in the figure below.

Turn on switch

“PTC” on the control PCB.

The trip mode is activated by “OH2:External thermal relay tripped.”

13

PTC

DC10V

Alarm temperature

Temperature

The figure in "H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)," shows that resistor 250

Ω and the thermistor (resistance value

Rp) are connected in parallel. Hence, voltage Vc

1

(Level) at terminal [C1] can be calculated by using the following formula.

250 Rp

Vc

1

=

250

1000

+

+

Rp

250 Rp

250

+

Rp

×

［

V

］

The operation level can be set by bringing Rp in the Vc

1 calculation formula into the following range.

Rp

1

< Rp < Rp

2

To obtain Rp easily, use the following formula.

Rp

=

Rp

1

+

2

Rp

2 ［Ω］

H28 Droop operation

When two or more motors drive a single machine, a higher load is placed on the motor rotating the fastest. Droop operation achieves a good load balance by applying drooping characteristics to speed against load variations.

Auto tuning(P04: 2) should be done to use this function.


The drooping speed at constant torque is set.

PTC thermistor

C1

Resistor

250 Ohom

11

ON OFF

1k Ohom

H27

(Level)

Comparator

OH2

H 2 8 D R O O P

Set value

:

-9.9Hz to 0.0Hz

Characteristics of the motor

When droop operation is active

Torque

Setting value of |H28|

When droop operation is inactive

Rated torque

(drive)

Freq. setting

0V

H27 PTC thermistor (Level)

X

The voltage input to terminal [C1] is compared to the set voltage (Level). When the input voltage is equal to or greater than the set voltage (Level), "H26 PTC thermistor

(Mode select)," starts.

H 2 7 P T C L E V E L

Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00V

X

The PTC thermistor has its own alarm temperature. The internal resistance value of the thermistor largely change at the alarm temperature. The operation (voltage) level is set using this change in the resistance value.

Freq.

setting value

+

+

0

Rated torque

(brake)

Acc/Dec calculation

+

H28 Droop freq.

+

Output freq.

Speed

Setting value of |H28|

P09 Slip compensation freq.

5-41

Feedback amount

τ

Torque calculation

+ : drive

- : brake

◆

This function cannot be used for FRN-P11S.

H30 Serial link (Function select)

X

The link function (communication function) provides

RS-485 (provided as standard) and bus connections

(optional).

The serial link function includes:

1) Monitoring (data monitoring, function data check)

2) Frequency setting

3) Operation command

(FWD, REV, and other commands for digital input)

4)Write function data

H 3 0 L I N K F U N C


Communication can be enabled and disabled by a digital input. This function sets the serial link function when communication is enabled.

Set value Frequency command

Operation command

Disabled

2 Disabled Enabled

3 Enabled Enabled

The data monitoring and function data write functions are always enabled. Disabling communication using digital input brings about the same result as when "0" is set to this function. When the bus option is installed, this setting selects the function of the option and the RS-485 interface is restricted to monitoring and writing function data.

H31 RS-485 (Address)

H39

RS-485 (Response interval)

These functions set the conditions of RS-485 Modbus-RTU communication. Set the conditions according to the upstream device. Refer to technical manual for the protocol.

X

This function sets the station address of RTU.

H 3 1 4 8 5 A D R E S S


X

This function sets processing at communication error and sets the error processing timer value.

H 3 2 M O D E O N E R


Set value Processing at communication error

0

1

2

Immediate Er 8 trip (forced stop)

Continue operation within timer time, Er8 trip after timer time.

Continue operation and effect retry within timer time, then invoke an Er8 trip if a communication error occurs. If an error does not occur, continue operation.

X

This function sets data length.

H 3 5 L E N G T H

Setting range: 0

Set value Data length

X

This function sets the parity bit.

H 3 6 P A R I T Y


Set value Parity bit

0 None

1 Even

2 Odd

X

This function sets the stop bit.

H 3 7 S T O P B I T S

Setting range: 0, 1

Set value Stop bit

The stop bit is automatically configured by the value of the parity bit. For parity

“NONE” the stop bit is 2bits. For parity

“EVEN” or “ODD” the stop bit is 1 bit.

X

In a system where the local station is always accessed within a specific time, this function detects that access was stopped due to an open-circuit or other fault and invokes an Er 8 trip.

H 3 8 N O R E S t

Setting range: 0 (No detection)

1 to 60 seconds

X

This function sets the time from when a request is issued from the upstream device to when a response is returned.

H 3 9 I N T E R V A L

Setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 second

H 3 3 T I E


X

This function sets the baud rate.

H 3 4 B A U D R A T E


Set value Baud rate bit/s bit/s bit/s bit/s

5-42

explanation for F03.

Motor 2

A01 Maximum frequency2

X

This function sets the maximum frequency for motor 2 output by the inverter. This function operates the same as "F03 Maximum frequency 1." For details, see the

A 0 1 M A X H z - 2

(A:Altemative Motor Parameters)

A11 Motor 2 (Capacity)

X

This function sets the capacity of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P02 Motor 1 (Capacity)." For details, see the explanation for P02. However, the related motor data functions change to "A12 Motor 2

(Rated current)," "A15 Motor 2 (No-load current)," "A16

Motor 2 (%R1 setting)," and "A17 Motor 2 (%X setting)."

A02

Base frequency 2

X

This function sets the maximum output frequency in the constant-torque area of motor 2 (i.e., output frequency at rated output voltage). This function operates the same as "F04 Base frequency 1." For details, see the explanation for F04.

A 1 1 M 2 - C A P

A 1 2 M 2 I r

A 0 2 B A S E H z - 2

A12 Motor 2 (Rated current)

X

This function sets the rated current of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P03 Motor 1 (Rated current)." For details, see the explanation for P03.

A03

Rated voltage 2

X

This function sets the rated value of voltage output to motor 2. This function operates the same as "F05

Rated voltage 1." For details, see the explanation for

F05.

A 0 3 R A T E D V 2

A13 Motor 2 (Tuning)

X

This function sets the auto tuning of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P04 Motor 1 (Tuning)."

For details, see the explanation for P04.

A 1 3 M 2 T U N 1

A04

Maximum voltage 2

X

This function sets the maximum value of the inverter output voltage of motor 2. This function operates the same as "F06 Maximum voltage 1." For details, see the explanation for F06.

A 0 4 M A X V - 2

A05

Torque boost 2

X

This function sets the torque boost function of motor 2.

This function operates the same as "F09 Torque boost

1." For details, see the explanation for F09.

A14 Motor 2 (On-line tuning)

X

This function sets the online tuning of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P05 Motor 1 (On-line tuning)." For details, see the explanation for P05.

A 1 4 M 2

A15

T U N 2

Motor 2 (No-load current)

X

This function sets the no-load current of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P06 Motor 1 (No-load current)." For details, see the explanation for P06.

A 1 5 M 2 I o

A 0 5 T R Q B O O S T 2

A06 Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Select)

A16

A17

Motor 2 (%R1 setting)

Motor 2 (%X setting)

A07 Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Level)

A08 Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Thermal time constant)

X

This function sets the function of the electronic thermal overload relay for motor 2. This function operates the same as F10 to F12, "Electronic thermal overload relay

1." For details, see the explanations for F10 to F12.

A 0 6 E L C T R N O L 2

A 0 7 O L L E V E L 2

A 0 8 T I M E C N S T 2

A09

Torque vector control 2

X

This function sets the torque vector function of motor 2.

This function operates the same as "F42 Torque vector control 1." For details, see the explanation for F42.

X

This function sets %R1 and %X of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P07 Motor 1 (%R1 setting)," and "P08 Motor 1 (%X setting)." For details, see the explanations for P07 and P08.

A 1 6 M 2 - % R 1

A 1 7 M 2 - % X

A18 Slip compensation control 2

X

This function sets the amount of slip compensation for motor 2. This function operates the same as "P09 Slip compensation control." For details, see the explanation for P09.

A 1 8 S L I P C O M P 2

Set value : 0.00Hz to 15.00Hz

A 0 9 T R Q V E C T O R 2

A10

Number of motor-2 poles

X

This function sets the number of poles of motor 2 to be driven. This function operates the same as "P01 Number

X

Calculate the amount of slip compensation using the following formula:

Slip compenssation amount

=

Base frequency

×

Slippage

Synchronou s

[ r / min] speed [ r /

［

Hz min]

］

of motor-1 poles." For details, see the explanation for P01.

A 1 0 M 2 P O L E S

Slippage = Synchronous speed-Rated speed

5-43

U01

U : User function

Maximum compensation frequency during braking torque limit - At acceleration,

X

This function becomes effective, when the torque limit

(brake) is used. The inverter controls to increase the output frequency so that torque calculations do not exceed the torque limit (brake) setting ( F41 or E17).

(When F41 or E17 is set to 999, it becomes invalid.)

This function sets the increment of upper limit for output frequency.

When the regeneration avoidance is selected, the resurrection ability can be improved by raising the increment of upper limit. However, the output frequency of the inverter is limited at the frequency limit(high): F15.

U 0 1

U S E R 0 1

Setting range : 0 to 65535

The set value "15" becomes 1Hz.

(The set value "1" becomes 1/15Hz)

U02 1st S-shape level at acceleration (start)

U03 2nd S-shape level at acceleration (stop)

U04 1st S-shape level at deceleration (start)

U05 2nd S-shape level at deceleration (stop)

X

When "2" is set in the function code: H07, both curvilinear acceleration and deceleration ranges of

S-shape can be set up arbitrarily.

The range is the ratio for maximum output frequency 1

(F03) or 2 (A01) .

|

| f f

1

−

1

−

f 0 f 0

|

≥

|

<

f f max

×

U 02 max

×

+

100

U 04

U 03

- At deceleration,

| f 1 tacc

−

=

f

(

0 f

| f

≥

1

−

f f max max

0

+

×

U tdec

=

( f 1

−

f 0

+

f max

linear Acceleration and deceleration clause

- At acceleration,

U 04

02

100

+

+

100

U

U

05

03

U 04

100

+

U 05

)

)

×

×

Ta

Td

S-shape clause

| f 1

−

f 0 |

<

f max

×

U 02

+

100

U 03

or,

- At deceleration,

+

100

or,

U 05 tacc tdec

=

=

2

×







2

×

f f 1

−

f f max

1

−

f 0 f 0 max

×

U 02

100

+

U 03

×

U 04

100

+

U 05







×

×

U 02

U 04

+

U 03

100

+

U 05

100

U 0 2

U

U 0 3

U

U 0 4

U S E R 0 4

U 0 5

U

Setting range : 1 to 50%

Output frequency f[Hz]

×

Ta

U08 Initial value of main DC link capacitor

U09 Measured value of main DC link capacitor

X

Data for the life expectancy judgment of the capacitor in main circuit is stored in this function. The electrical discharge time of the capacitor can be measured automatically, and the time of part replacement can be confirmed according to the decrement rate from the factory shipment.

U 0 8

U S E R 0 8

×

Td

U 0 9

U S E R 0 9

Setting range : 0 to 65535 f1

U03 U04

U02 U05 f0

0 tacc tdec t[s]

X

100% value of this function means maximum frequency

(fmax) .

Acceleration time “tacc” and deceleration time “tdec” of upper figure become longer than the linear acceleration time and deceleration time. When the set acceleration time(F07，E10，E12，E14) is assumed to be “Ta” and deceleration time(F08，E11，E13，E15) is assumed to be “Td”, “tacc” and “tdec” can be calculated by the following expressions.

X

The electrical discharge time which is measured in the factory shipment is set to function code U08 as a initial value. This value is different in each inverter.

X

The electrical discharge time of the capacitor is measured automatically, when the power supply is turned off. And, the result is stored in function code

U09.

When the power supply is turned off under the conditions as follows, decrement rate (%) to the factory shipment can be measured.

Conditions: which has been described to "*Estimation of life expectancy based on maintenance information" of the instruction manual "8-2 periodical inspection".

The result of

U 09

×

100

is displayed in CAP=xxx.x%

U 08

of maintenance information. 85% becomes a standard at the part replacement time.

5-44

◆

When you make measurement of capacity and life expectancy judgment of capacitor with an actual operating condition, set the value “30” to the function code “E20 to E24”. And write the measurement result

U09 with an actual operating condition to the function code U08 as an initial value as early as possible since inverter operation starts.

However, life judgment by the measurement result cannot be performed in case of 1 and 2 as below.

1. During inverter operation, a power supply is turned off and it stops.

2. Cooling fan ON/OFF control is used.

(function code : H 06= 1)

Turn off the power supply of inverter, on the conditions at which the inverter has stopped, and a cooling fan is operated. It is not necessary to remove an option card and the connection with a control terminal.

As for this "measurement with an actual operating condition", carry out this measurement about 10 times to minimize the error of a measurement result, and make the average value into an initial value.

Moreover, when there is 10% or more of change from the last measured value, measurement is disregarded in order to prevent incorrect measurement. Renewal of a display is not carried out.

◆

Set measured value U09 to the initial value U08 after exchanging capacitors.

Related Functions

E20 to E24

(Set value：30)

U10

PC board capacitor powered on time

◆

The accumulation time of the capacitor on PC board are displayed. The accumulation time of the control power supply multiplied by the life expectancy coefficient defined by the temperature inside the inverter are displayed. Hence, the hours displayed may not agree with the actual operating hours. Since the accumulation time are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.

The accumulation time are displayed in TCAP=xxxxxh of maintenance information. The standard at the replacement time is 61,000h. Refer to the manual "8-2 regular check" for the maintenance.

U 1 0

U S E R 1 0

Setting range： 0 to 65535 hours

◆

Clear the accumulation time to 0 hour, after replacing the PC board on which capacitors are equipped with.

There is also PC Board without the capacitor

(ex :Control circuit board) not to be cleared the accumulation time. For details, contact Fuji Electric.


E20 to E24

(Set value：30)

U11

Cooling fan operating time

◆

The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are displayed. Since the integrated hours are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded. The integrated hours are displayed in

TFAN=xxxxxh of maintenance information.

The standard at the replacement time is 40,000h in the inverter of 5HP or less. The standard at the replacement time is 25,000h in the inverter of 7.5HP or more. (Estimated life expectancy of a cooling-fan at inverter ambient temperature of 40 degree.)

The displayed value should be considered as a rough estimate because the actual life of a cooling fan is influenced significantly by the temperature. Refer to the manual "8-2 regular check" for the maintenance.

U 1 1

U S E R 1 1

Setting range : 0 to 65535 hours

◆

Clear integrated operating time to 0 hour after replacing the cooling fan.


E20 to E24

(Set value：30)

U13 Magnetize current vibration damping gain

◆ Adjust if Magnetize current vibration was occurred in the inverter output current .

U 1 3

U S E R 1 3


◆

Adjust the value from 0 to 2048 as a standard value.

Vibration damping gain becomes 100% in set value 4096.

U15 Slip compensation filter time constant

◆

The filter time constant of Slip compensation is set.

U 1 5

U S E R 1 5


◆ Calculate the filter time constant using the following formula.

Filter time constant

=

" U15"

2

16 set value

[ms]

◆ The response time of the control slows because the filter time constant is enlarged when a value is set to smaller. However, system becomes steady.

◆

The response time of the control quickens because the filter time constant becomes smaller, when a set value is enlarged.

Note ： Response time quickens when a set value is enlarged. Therefore, there is a possibility that the output frequency becomes unstable. Please adjust a set value to smaller than factory setting value.

U23 Integral gain of continuous operation at power failure

U24 Proportional gain of continuous operation at power failure

◆

This function becomes effective, when function code

F14 (Restart mode after momentary power failure) set value is 2 or 3.

U 2 3

U S E R 2 3

U 2 4

U S E R 2 4

Setting range : 0～65535

◆ In case of F14 set value : 2.

When the operation continuation level (H15) is reached, deceleration to a stop occurs. The DC voltage of the main circuit sharpens the deceleration slope, and the inverter collects the inertia energy of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage and controls the motor until it stops, so that the undervoltage protective function is not activated.

The deceleration slope is adjusted with U23 and U24.

However, the deceleration operation time never becomes longer than the set deceleration time.

5-45

◆

In case of F14 set value : 3.

The output frequency is lowered by the control by which the DC voltage of the main circuit is kept constant from the regeneration energy, so that the inverter may continue operation when momentary power failure occurs.

The response is adjusted with U23 and U24 at this time.

◆

Calculate the integral gain using the following formula.

Integral gain

=

" U 23"

2

16 set value

[ms]

Output frequency command

|ｆ

＊

|

Output frequency command

|ｆ＊＊ |

|ｆ

＊

|

H15

Set value

PI calculator

0

I gain：U23

P gain：U24

DC voltage of the main circuit

U48 Input phase loss protection

◆

This function selects operation of input phase loss or power supply unbalance protection.

U 4 8

U S E R 4 8


Set value Operation

0

1

Active (without reactor (ACR/DCR))

Active (with reactor (ACR/DCR))

2 Inactive

△

CAUTION

When "2" is set to U48, protection operation of the inverter to input phase loss or power supply voltage unbalance does not work. If you use it as it is, there is a possibility of damaging an inverter.


U49 RS-485 protocol selection

◆

The protocol of RS-485 communication is changed.

U 4 9

U S E R 4 9

Set value : 0, 1

Set value Operation

0 FGI-bus

1 Modbus-RTU

Instruction manual and specifications are prepared about communicative details. Contact Fuji Electric.

U56 Speed agreement /PG error(Detection width)

U57

Speed agreement /PG error (Detection timer)

U58

PG e rro r sele ction

◆

These functions are effective for the option card

( OPC-G11S-PG，-PG2).

Refer to each manual.

U 5 6

U

U 5 7

U

U 5 8

U

U59

Braking - resistor function select

[30HP or less is corresponded]

◆

When function code F13 (electronic thermal)is set to 2, both the type of the braking resistor and connection circuit are set. Factory setting is set to nominal applied resistor and the number of resistor is one. When the power load capacities of resistor are increased, set the factory setting properly

U 5 9

U S E R 5 9

Setting range : 0 to A8 (HEX)

Setting of ten’s digit ( type selection )

Set value Type braking resistor

Resistance

Capacity

[Ω]

[W]

Duty cycle

[%ED]

0 Standard applied resistor

1 DB0.75-2C

2 DB2.2-2C

3 DB3.7-2C

4 DB5.5-2C

5 DB7.5-2C

6 DB0.75-4C

7 DB2.2-4C

8 DB3.7-4C

9 DB5.5-4C

A DB7.5-4C

100 200

40 400

33 400

20 800

15 900

200 200

160 400

130 400

80 800

60 900

Setting of unit’s digit (connection circuit selection)

Use number

Braking-resistor

Connection circuit

*1)

Duty cycle

[%ED]

Synthetic resistance

[Ω]

Power consumption per resistance

[comparatively]

0 1 10% R 100%

ＰＤＢ

1 2 20% 2R 50%

ＰＤＢ

2 2

3 4

4 3

5 6

6 9

7 4

8 8

Ｐ

Ｐ

Ｐ

Ｐ

Ｐ

Ｐ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

20% (1/2)R

ＤＢ

40% R

ＤＢ

30% 3R 33%

ＤＢ

50% (3/2)R

ＤＢ

50% R

50%

25%

17%

11%

ＤＢ

40% 4R 25%

ＤＢ

50% 2R 12.5%

1) It is limited by the %ED value of the braking transistor inside the inverter.

5-46

△

CAUTION

◆

Set the function code both “ F13” and “U59 ” before operating the inverter, and don’t change the functions during operation. The integrated thermal data are cleared immediately, when function code “ F13” or

“U59 ” are changed. The overheat protection of resistor becomes invalid. When the function code

“ F13” or “U59 ” are changed in the state where temperature rose, the overheat protection of resistor becomes invalid, too.

◆ As there is a possibility of damaging the inverter, the resistor value less than standard applied value should not be available.

◆ Make into one kind the resistor used as combination conditions for a braking resistor, and connect it so that the electric power is consumed equally in each resistor.

◆ When the resistor which is instead of DB***-2C/4C are used as External braking resistor, function code F13 should be set to “0”.

◆

When resistor values less than Standard applied resistor value is set to the function code, regeneration operation is invalid. OU alarm will be occurred.

◆

If connection of resistor and setting value of resistor is not corresponded, there is a possibility of damaging the resistor and the inverter.


U59

Function for manufacturer

[40HP or more is corresponded]

This function is available to release the overheating alarm

(OH1) at the DC fan broken.

U 5 9

U S E R 5 9

Set value : 00, 01

Set value

00

01

Operation

OH1 alarm at DC fan broken

No alarm at DC fan broken

△

CAUTION

◆

It causes overheating trip (OH1,OH3) in the inverter, and the life time decrease such as electrolytic capacitors on the PCB in the unit by a partial rise temperature, and there is a possibility to the worst unit damage when left with the DC fan for an internal stir stops.

Be sure that set it to the fan exchange and the factory setting value again promptly after the DC fan for an internal stir stops. (Contact the fan exchange procedure Fuji Electric.)


U60 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration

◆ This function is available, when torque limit (brake) of

F41( or E17) is set to “0%”.

U 6 0

U S E R 6 0

Set value : 0, 1

Set value

0

1

Operation

Torque limit operation

（ for high response use）

OU alarm avoidance operation

（ for only deceleration or Large inertia use ）

5-47

◆

If function code U60 is set to “0”, braking torque is kept to about “0%” under acceleration, deceleration, constant speed state. Output frequency is controlled in correspond to the rapid change in motor load to prevent OU alarm. Deceleration time becomes longer than the set deceleration time (F08).

◆ In case of setting value U60:1, Compared with setting value "0", it controls not to perform torque limit operation only at the deceleration time, but to prevent the rise of the DC voltage of the main circuit, and avoid OU alarm.

At this time, although deceleration time becomes longer than a setting value of F08, it becomes shorter than setting value"0" of U60. It may occur OU alarm, if load changes rapidly during deceleration.

U61 Voltage detect offset and gain adjustment

◆

40HP or more :

It adjusts, only when a print board is replaced by maintenance, etc. If not necessary, do not use this function.

U 6 1

U S E R 6 1

Operation

Set value : 0, 1, 2

Inverter capacity

30HP or less 0：Inactive(fixed)

40HP or more

0：Inactive

1：Voltage detect offset adjustment

2：Voltage detect gain adjustment

◆ Set the function code in the following procedure.

If the inverter are operated without this adjustment after replacing the PC board, normal operation may not be able to be performed.

(Offset adjustment)

1) Confirm that the main power supply is turned ON, the motor wiring are connected and the motor has stopped (inverter operation command is OFF).

2) When the data of U61 is changed to "1", and the

FUNC/DATA key is ON, the offset self adjustment is started. The display of “storing" of the keypad panel disappears several seconds later. When the set value returns to "0", adjustment is completed.

If the main power supply is turned OFF, while outputting alarm, motor is driving, coast-to-stop command(BX) is ON and this adjustment is started, the inverter becomes “Er7:TUNING ERROR".

In this case, start the adjustment after removing the above-mentioned factor.

(Gain adjustment)

1) Drive the motor in an arbitrary frequency of about 10 to

60Hz(However, constant speed) after executing the above-mentioned offset adjustment.(U61:1)

At this time, gain adjustment is available unrelated to the load state.

2) When the data of U61 is changed to "2", and the

FUNC/DATA key is ON, the gain self adjustment is started. The display of “storing" of the keypad panel disappears several seconds to 30 seconds later. When the set value returns to "0", adjustment is completed.

If inverter is not operated, this adjustment is not available.

U89 Motor overload memory retention

◆

This is Motor overload memory (Electrical thermal O/L relay) retention selection at power up.

U 8 9

0

1

U S E R 8 9

Setting range : 0, 1

Set value Operation

Inactive

When power up the drive, Motor overload data is reset.

Active.

When power is down, the drive stores

Motor overload data and use this data at next power up.

5-48

6. Protective Operation

6-1 List of Protective Operations

In the event of an abnormality in the inverter, the protective function will activate immediately to trip the inverter, display the alarm name on the LED monitor, and the motor coasts-to-a stop. For alarm contents, see Section 6.1.1.

Table 6.6.1 List of alarm displays and protective functions

Alarm Name

Over current

Ground fault

Overvoltage

Undervoltage

Input open-phase

Overheating of heat sink

External alarm

Inverter internal overheating

Overheating of braking resistor

Motor 1 overload

Motor 2 overload

Inverter overload

Blown fuse

Memory error

Keypad panel communication error

CPU error

Option error

Forced stop

Output wiring error

Keypad panel display

LED LCD

OC1

OC DURING ACC During acceleration

OC2

OC DURING DEC During deceleration

OC3

OC AT SET SPD Running at constant speed

Contents of operation

If the inverter output current momentarily exceeds the overcurrent detection level due to an overcurrent in the motor, or a short-circuit or a ground fault in the output circuit, the protective function is activated.

EF

GROUND FAULT If a ground fault in the inverter output circuit is detected, the protective function is activated (for 40HP or more only). If a ground fault occurs in an inverter rated at 30HP or less, the inverter is protected by the overcurrent protection. If protection against personal injury or property damage is required, install a ground-fault protective relay or earth-leakage circuit breaker separately.

OU1

OV DURING ACC During acceleration

OU2

OV DURING DEC During deceleration

OU3

OV AT SET SPD

Running at constant speed

If the DC link circuit voltage of the main circuit exceeds the overvoltage detection level (230V series: 400V DC,460V series: 800V

DC) due to an increase in the regenerating current from the motor, the output is shut down.

However, protection against inadvertent overvoltage apply (e.g., high-voltage line) may not be provided.

LU

UNDERVOLTAGE If the DC link circuit voltage of the main circuit falls below the undervoltage detection level (230V series: 200V DC,460V series: 400V DC) due to a lowered power supply, the output is shut down. If function code F14 (Restart after momentary power failure) is selected, an alarm is not displayed. In addition, if the supply voltage falls to a level unable to maintain control power, an alarm may not be displayed.

Lin

PHASE LOSS If the inverter is driven with any one of the three phases connected to L1/R, L2/S and L3/T of the main circuit power supply "open", the rectifying diodes or smoothing capacitors may be damaged, at such time an alarm is issued and the inverter is tripped.

OH1

FIN OVERHEAT If the temperature of the heat sink rises due to a cooling fan failure, etc., the protective function is activated.

OH2

EXT ALARM If the external alarm contacts of the braking unit, braking resistor or external thermal O/L relay are connected to the control circuit terminals (THR), this alarm will be actuated according to contact off signal.

When the PCT thermal protection is activated(H26:1), it operates when the detected temperature is increased.

OH3

HIGH AMB TEMP If the temperature inside the inverter rises due to poor ventilation, etc., the protective function is activated.

Overcurrent of the terminal 13(20mA or more) due to the short circuit between the terminal 13 and 11, etc., the protective function is activated. dbH

DBR OVERHEAT If electronic thermal O/L relay (for braking resistor) function code F13 is selected, the protective function is activated to prevent the resistor from burning due to overheating following frequent use of the braking resistor.

OL1

MOTOR1 OL The protective function is activated if the motor current exceeds the preset level, provided that electronic thermal O/L relay 1 function code F10 has been selected.

OL2

MOTOR2 OL If the second motor current exceeds the preset level when the operation is switched to drive the second motor, the protective function is activated, provided that electronic thermal O/L relay 2 of function code A04 is selected.

OLU

INVERTER OL If the output current exceeds the rated overload current, the protective function is activated to provide thermal protection against semiconductor element overheating in the inverter main circuit.

FUS

DC FUSE OPEN If the fuse in the inverter is blown out following a short-circuit or damage to the internal circuit, the protective function is activated (for 40HP or more only).

Er1

MEMORY ERROR If a memory error occurs, such as missing or invalid data, the protective function is activated.

Er2

KEYPD COM ERR If a communication error or interrupt between the keypad panel and control circuit is detected, the protective function is activated.

Er3

CPU ERROR

Er4

OPTN COM ERR

If an CPU error occurs due to noise, etc., the protective function is activated.

Error when using an optional unit

Er5

OPTION ERROR

Er6

OPR PROCD ERR ・ Error when using the forced stop command

・ When F02 is set to “1” or “3” and the STOP key is pressed

・ When F02 is set to “3” or “4” and the operation start safety function is activated

・

When Hz2/Hz1 and Hz1/Hz2 are selected at the same time

Er7

TUNING ERROR If there is an open circuit or a connection error in the inverter output wiring during performing auto-tuning, the protective function is activated.

RS-485 communication error

Er8

RS-485 COM ERR If an error occurs when using RS-485, the protective function is activated.

6-1

6-2 Alarm Reset

To release the trip status, enter the reset command

10ms or inputting signal from the terminal (RST) of the control terminals after removing the cause of the trip. Since the reset command is an edge operation, input a command such as !!OFF-ON-OFF!! as shown in

Fig.6-2-1.

When releasing the trip status, set the operation command to OFF. If the operation command is set to ON, inverter will start operation after resetting.

Reset command

OFF ON OFF

Keypad panel display

Alarm output

OFF ON OFF

Fig.6-2-1

Normal display

Alarm display

(Operable)

！

WARNING

If the alarm reset is activated with the operation signal ON, the inverter will restart suddenly, which may be dangerous. To ensure safety, disable the operating signal when releasing the trip status.

as accident may result.

6-2

7.Trouble shooting

7.1 Protective function activation

(1) Overcurrent

Overcurrent during acceleration

OC1

Overcurrent during deceleration

OC2

Overcurrent running at constant speed

OC3

Remove the short-circuit and ground fault.

Reduce the load or increase

the inverter capacity.

YES

Are the motor connecting terminals (U, V, W) short-circuited or grounded?

NO NO NO

NO

Is the load excessive?

NO

NO Can the torque boost amount be reduced?

YES

Reduce the torque boost.

NO

NO Is the torque boost correct?

YES

Is the acceleration time setting too short compared with the load?

YES

NO

Faulty inverter or error

due to noise.

Consult with Fuji Electric.

Is the deceleration time setting too short compared

with the load?

YES

NO

YES Can the acceleration time

setting be prolonged?

NO

YES

Prolong time settings.

Can the deceleration time

setting be prolonged?

NO

Has the load changed

suddenly?

YES



The braking method requires inspection.

Contact Fuji Electric.



(2) Ground fault

Ground fault

EF

Remove the grounded part.

YES

Is a part in the inverter output circuit (cable, motor) grounded?

Faulty inverter or error due to noise.


NO

Note:The ground fault protective function is provided only for inverter for nominal applied motors rated at 40HP or more.

(3) Fuse brown

Fuse brown

FUS

Possible short-circuit within the inverter.


7-1

(4) Overvoltage

Overvoltage during acceleration

OU1

Overvoltage during deceleration

OU2

Overvoltage running at constant speed

OU3

Reduce the supply voltage to less than the specified upper limit.

NO

Is the power supply voltage within the specified value?

YES YES YES

Is start mode(H09) activated and its start-mode?

NO NO NO

YES

Check the motor and /or the terminal(U, V, W) is shorted or ground fault.

Is restart mode after momentary power failure or

NO operation switching between line and inverter?

NO NO

YES

Does OU activated when the load is suddenly removed?

NO NO NO

YES

Restart time(H13) is set longer.

Faulty inverter or error due to noise.


NO

NO

YES

Does the main circuit DC link circuit voltage exceed the protection level?

Does OU alarm activate when acceleration is completed?

YES

YES

Can the acceleration time be prolonged?

NO

YES

Can the deceleration time be prolonged?

NO

Reduce.

YES

NO

Can the moment of load inertia be reduced?

NO

YES

NO

YES

Prolong.

NO

Is the braking device or DC brake function in use?

YES YES YES

NO

Consider using a braking system or DC brake function.

Inspect the braking method. Contact Fuji Electric.

(5) Low voltage

Low voltage

LU

Has a (momentary) power failure occurred?

NO

YES Reset and restart operation.

Is the power supply voltage within the specified value?

NO

YES

Is there a load requiring a large starting current within the same power distribution group?

YES

Faulty of inverter control circuit or error due to noise, etc.


NO

Faulty parts or loose connection in the power circuit?

Modify power distribution system to satisfy the specified value.

YES Replace the faulty part and repair the connection.

NO

Does LU activate when the circuit breaker or magnetic contactor is switched on?

YES

Is power transformer capacity adequate?

NO

YES

YES

Is the main circuit DC voltage

(between P-N) higher than the detection level specified in Section 6.1.1?

NO

The inverter may be faulty.


7-2

(6) Overtemperature at inside air

and overheating at heatsink.

Overtemperature at inside air OH3

Overtemperature at inside air OH3 terminals 13-11 closed?

NO

Overheating at heatsink OH1

Overheating

Is between the control terminals 13-11 closed?

NO

YES

Check the temperature of the heatsink using the alarm information displayed on the keypad panel.

Remove the short circuit.

Check the temperature of the heatsink using the alarm information displayed on the keypad panel.

Is the cooling fan for mixing inside air rotating?

(40HP or more)

Check the keypad panel display.

Display limit or not?

Does the heatsink

YES temperature indicate

NO

YES circuit on PCB.

NO


Contact Fuji Electric. temperature of the inverter –10 degrees C


YES

NO

Make peripheral

Reduce the load.

inverter to meet the specification.

Is the cooling fan rotating?

Is the cooling fan rotating? YES

YES

Is the cooling air passage blocked?

rotating?

(40HP or more) NO

YES(30HP or less)

Is the ambient

Is the cooling air temperature within

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

Is the ambient

NO temperature within

YES

Reduce the load.

Replace the cooling fan.

Replace the cooling fan.

Remove obstacles.

for mixing inside air.

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc.



Contract Fuji Electric. conditions to meet the specification.

conditions to meet the specification. no

(8) Inverter unit overload and motor overload

(7) External thermal relay tripped

External thermal relay tripped

OH2

NO

Is PTC MODE

H26 enabled?

YES

Is PTC operating?

NO

YES

Incorrect motor load or inadequate cooling.

Check the motor side.

Is PTC level

H27 set correctly?

YES

Is the external circuit

(including constants) regular?

YES

NO

NO



Set to correct value.

Change to regular external circuit.

Inverter unit overload OLU

Motor overload

OL1, OL2

Is data input to the control terminals

THR-X1 to X9?

Are alarm signals from external equipment input to the terminals and the CM?

YES

Is the alarm function of the external equipment operating correctly?

YES

NO

NO

Connect the alarm signal contact.

Remove the cause of alarm function activation.

Do the characteristics of the electronic thermal

O/L relay and motor overload match?

YES

Is the electronic thermal

O/L relay setting correct?

YES

NO Connect a thermal

O/L relay externally.

NO

Set to the correct level


YES

NO



Reduce the load or increase inverter capacity



7-3

(9) Memory error Er1,

Keypad panel communication error Er2,

CPU error Er3

Er1,2,3 indicated. Abnormal display or indication goes out.

Turn the power off then on

again after the CHARGE lamp

(CRG) goes off.

Is disappeared an error code on the LED monitor?

YES

NO

Is Er1 displayed?

YES

NO

Is the auxiliary control power input terminal used?

YES

NO

Did the power off when the function data was writing?

YES

NO

The trouble part is improvement.

YES

Is there noise source around?

NO

Is it possible to reset the alarm after the initialize by H03?

YES

Inverter is normal.

Continue operation.

NO

Inverter may be faulty.


(11) Input phase loss

Input phase loss

Lin

(10) Output wiring error

(10) Output wiring error

YES

Output wiring error Er7

Are the braking unit and braking resistor connected incorrectly?

NO

YES

Is Er7 displayed?

NO

YES

Did the error occur during tuning?

NO

Are the braking unit and braking resistor connected incorrectly?

NO

Is the wiring of CNRXTX(RED) correct on the power PCB?

(When DC power supply, connect it to the

R0-T0 side and AC power input is connected to the auxilialy power input terminal.)

NO

YES

Connect correctly or replace the cable.

YES





Connect correctly the cable.

Connect correctly the cable.

Is The U,V,W terminal wiring not connected

NO

YES

Connect correctly or replace the cable.

Is the keypad panel connector loose?

NO

YES

Is the operation signal

OFF during auto-tuning?

NO

YES

Secure the connector.

Do not operation signal OFF until finishing the auto tuning.

Is it overcurrent limiting because of small value of accelaration/deceleration time (F07/F08)?

NO

YES Acceleration/Deceleration time is longer.

Is the coast-to-stop signal(BX) ON?

NO

YES



It is OFF.

NO Is the inverter ROM No.

S09000 or more?

YES

Is the setting value of input phase loss protection

(U48) is correct?

YES

NO

Set it correct value.

Are all main circuit power supply terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T connected to the power supply?

YES

NO Connect all three phases.

Are there loose screws on the terminal block?

NO

YES Tightenen the screws on the terminal block.

Is there a significant imbalance voltage between phases?

NO

YES



The power supply is incorrect.

The inspection of the power supply is needed including the wiring.

(12) Charging circuit error

Charging circuit error

Er7

Is circuit power supply terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T supplied the power voltage?

YES



NO

Input the voltage.

7-4

7-2 Abnormal motor rotation

(1) If motor does not rotate

Motor does not rotate.

Charge lamp (CRG) lights and LCD monitor lights up?

YES

NO

Remove the cause of alarm function activation and reset the alarm, then run the motor.

YES

Is the LCD monitor displaying an alarm mode screen?

NO

Is operation method the keypad panel or control terminal input?

Keypad panel

Control terminals If no error is detected, continue operation.

YES

Does the motor run if FWD or REV is pressed?

NO

Press the !Up! key and set

∧ the frequency.

NO

Was the forward or reverse operation command given?

YES YES

NO Has the frequency been set?

YES YES

NO

YES

Does the motor start

∧ is pressed?

NO

Set the frequency correctly.

Faulty motor

YES

Are the frequency limiter

(High) and the frequency setting lower than the starting frequency?

NO

Are the inverter output terminals (U,V,W) provided with the proper voltage?

YES

Are the circuit breaker and magnetic contactor on the power supply side switched on?

YES

Are the voltages on the power terminals

(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) normal?

YES

NO

Turn on.

NO

Check for problems

(low voltage, an open-phase, a loose connection,

poor contact) and remedy accordingly.

NO

Are external wiring between control circuit terminals

FWD, REV -CM connected correctly?

NO

NO

Is a jumper or DC reactor connected between terminals P1 and P(+)?

YES

NO

Connect.



YES Replace the faulty switch or relay.

Is the external wiring between control terminals

13, 12, 11, C1and V2 or between X1-X9 and

CM for the multistep frequency selection connected correctly?

YES

NO

Correct the wiring error.

Replace the faulty frequency setting POT (VR)

, signal converter, switch,



NO

Excessive load?

YES

YES

Are the cables to the motor connected correctly?

NO

Correct the wiring error.

Is the torque boost set correctly?

YES

NO

Raise the torque boost.

The load is excessive, resulting in motor lock.

Reduce the load and check that the brake is released

(if a mechanical brake is used).

Note: Monitor the operation

command or frequency setting

values, etc., on the LED or LCD

monitor after selecting

the respective functions.

The motor does not rotate if the following commands are issued.

An operation command is issued while the coast-to-stop or DC braking command is output

A reverse operation command is issued with the “H08 Rev. phase sequence lock” value set to 1.

7-5

(2) If the motor rotates but the speed does not change

The motor rotates but the speed does not change.

Is the maximum frequency setting too low?

NO

YES

Increase the setting.

Change the setting.

YES

Is the higher or lower frequency limiter activating?

NO Keypad panel operation

Set the frequency.

YES

Does the speed change when the or

∨

∧

NO

YES

Is the timer timing too long?

NO

Pattern operation

YES

Is the pattern operation complete?

NO

Which frequency setting methodis used: keypad panel, analog signal, multistep frequency, or UP/DOWN control?

Is the pattern operation activated?

Analog signal

Multistep frequency

UP/DOWN

YES

Are all acceleration and deceleration times identical?

NO

Are the external connections between

X1-X9 and CM correct?

YES

NO Correct the connection error.

Can the frequency setting signal(0 to

±

10V,

4 to 20 mA)

be changed?

NO

NO

YES

Are the external connections between control terminals 13, 12,11

,V2 and C1 correct?

YES

Are the frequencies for each multistep frequency different?

NO Change the frequency setting.

Replace the faulty frequency setting

POT (VR) or signal converter as required.



NO

Is the acceleration or deceleration time set too long?

YES

Change the time setting to conform to load values.

In the following cases, changing the motor speed is also restricted:

Signals are input from control terminals both 12 and C1 when

“F01 Frequency command 1”and “C30

Frequency command 2

” are set to 3, and there is no significant change in the added value

The load is excessive, and the torque limiting and current limiting functions are activated

7-6

(3) If the motor stalls during acceleration

The motor stalls during acceleration.

Is the acceleration time too short?

NO

YES

Prolong the time.

Is the inertia moment of the motor or the load excessive?

NO

YES

Is a special motor used?

NO

YES


Use a thicker cable between the inverter and the motor or shorten the cable length.

YES Has the motor terminal voltage dropped?

NO

Reduce the inertia moment of the load or increase the inverter capacity.

Reduce the torque of the load or increase the inverter capacity.

YES Is the torque of the load excessive?

NO

Is the torque boost set correctly?

NO

YES



Increase the torque boost.

(4) If the motor generates abnormal heat

The motor generates abnormal heat.

Is the torque boost excessive?

NO

YES

Reduce the torque boost.

Has the motor been operated continuously at a very low speed?

NO

YES Use a motor exclusive to the inverter.


NO

YES Reduce the load or increase motor capacity.

Is the inverter output voltage (at terminals

U, V, W) balanced?

NO

YES



Faulty motor

Note: Motor overheating following a higher frequency

setting is likely the result of current waveform.


7-7

8. Maintenance and Inspection

Proceed with daily inspection and periodic inspection to prevent malfunction and ensure long-term reliability. Note the following:

8-1 Daily Inspection

During operation, a visual inspection for abnormal operation is completed externally without removing the covers

The inspections usually cover the following:

(1) The performance (satisfying the standard specification) is as expected.

(2) The environment satisfies standard specifications.

(3) The keypad panel display is normal.

(4) There are no abnormal sounds, vibrations, or odors.

(5) There are no indications of overheating or no discoloration.

8-2 Periodical Inspection

Periodic inspections must be completed after stopping operations, cutting off the power source, and removing the surface cover.

Note that after turning off the power, the smoothing capacitors in the DC section in the main circuit take time to discharge. To prevent electric shock, confirm using a multimeter that the voltage has dropped below the safety value (25 V DC or below) after the charge lamp (CRG) goes off.

！

WARNING

•

•

•

Start the inspection at least five minutes after turning off the power supply for inverter rated at 30HP or less, and ten minutes for inverter rated at 40HP or more. (Check that the charge lamp (CRG) goes off, and that the voltage is 25V

DC or less between terminals P(+) and N(-). Electric shock may result.

Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance and component replacement operations. (Remove metal jewelry such as watches and rings.)

(Use insulated tools.))

Never modify the inverter.


Table 8-2-1 Periodical inspection list

Check parts

Environment

Keypad panel

Structure such as a frame or cover

Common

Conductor and wire

Check items

1) Check the ambient temperature, humidity, vibration, atmosphere (dust, gas, oil mist, water drops).

2) Is the area surrounding the equipment clear of foreign objects.

1) Is the display hard to read?

2) Are the characters complete?

How to inspect

1) Conduct visual inspection and use the meter.

2) Visual inspection

Evaluation Criteria

1) The specified standard value must be satisfied.

2) The area is clear.

1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration?

2) Are nuts or bolts loose?

3) Is there deformation or damage?

4) Is there discoloration as a result of overheating?

5) Are there stains or dust?

1),2) Visual inspection 1),2) The display can be read and is not abnormal.

1) Visual and aural inspection

2) Tighten.

3),4),5) Visual inspection

1) Are there loose or missing nuts or bolts?

2) Are there deformation, cracks, damage, and discoloration due to overheating or deterioration in the equipment and insulation?

1) Tighten.

2),3) Visual inspection

3) Are there stains and dust?

1) Is there discoloration or distortion of a conductor due to overheating?

2) Are there cracks, crazing or discoloration of the cable sheath?

1),2) Visual inspection

1), 2), 3), 4), 5) Not abnormal

1), 2), 3) Not abnormal

Note: Discoloration of the bus bar does not indicate a problem.

1), 2) Not abnormal

8-1

Terminal block Is there damage?

Smoothing capacitor

1) Is there electrolyte leakage, discoloration, crazing, or swelling of the case?

2) Is the safety valve not protruding or are valves protruding too far?

3) Measure the capacitance if necessary.

Resistor 1) Is there unusual odor or damage to the insulation by overheating?

2) Is there an open circuit?

Visual inspection

1), 2) Visual inspection

3) * Estimate life expectancy from maintenance information and from measurements using capacitance measuring equipment.

1) Visual and olfactory inspection

2) Conduct a visual

Inspection or use a multimeter by removing the connection on one side.

Aural, olfactory, and visual inspection

1) Aural inspection


Not abnormal

1), 2) Not abnormal

3) Capacitance ≧ initial value x 0.85

1) Not abnormal

2) Less than about

±10% of the indicated resistance value

Transformer and reactor

Magnetic conductor and relay

Control PC board and connector

Is there abnormal buzzing or an unpleasant smell?

1) Is there rattling during operation?

2) Are the contacts rough?

1) Are there any loose screws or connectors?

2) Is there an unusual odor or discoloration?

3) Are there cracks, damage, deformation, or excessive rust?

4) Is there electrolyte leakage or damage to the capacitor?

1) Tighten.

2) Visual and olfactory inspection


4) * Estimate life expectancy by visual inspection and maintenance information

Not abnormal

1),2)Not abnormal

1),2),3),4)Not abnormal

Cooling fan 1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration?

2) Are nuts or bolts loose?

3) Is there discoloration due to overheating?

1) Aural and visual inspection. Turn manually (confirm the power is off).

2) Tighten.


4) * Estimate life expectancy by maintenance information

Visual inspection

1) The fan must rotate smoothly.

2), 3) Not abnormal

Ventilation Is there foreign matter on the heat sink or intake and exhaust ports?

Not abnormal

Note: If equipment is stained, wipe with a clean cloth. Vacuum the dust.

∗Estimation of life expectancy based on maintenance information

The maintenance information is stored in the inverter keypad panel and indicates the electrostatic capacitance of the main circuit capacitors and the life expectancy of the electrolytic capacitors on the control PC board and of the cooling fans. Use this data as the basis to estimate the life expectancy of parts.

1) Determination of the capacitance of the main circuit capacitors

This inverter is equipped with a function to automatically indicate the capacitance of the capacitors installed in the main circuit when powering up the inverter again after disconnecting the power according to the prescribed conditions.

The initial capacitance values are set in the inverter when shipped from the factory, and the decrease ratio (%) to those values can be displayed.

Use this function as follows:

8-2

(1) Remove any optional cards from the inverter. Also disconnect the DC bus connections to the main circuit P(+) and N(-) terminals from the braking unit or other inverters if connected. The existing power-factor correcting reactor (DC reactor) need not be disconnected.

A power supply introduced to the auxiliary input terminals (R0, T0) that provides control power should be isolated.

(2) Disable all the digital inputs (FWD, REV, X1-X9) on the control terminals. Also disconnect

RS-485 communication if used.

Turn on the main power supply. Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and that the inverter is not operating. (There is no problem if the "OH2 External thermal relay tripped" trip function is activated due to the digital input terminal setting off.)

(3) Turn the main power off.

(4) Turn on the main power again after verifying that the charge lamp is completely off.

(5) Open the maintenance information on the keypad panel and confirm the capacitance values of the built-in capacitors.

2) Life expectancy of the control PC board

The actual capacitance of a capacitor is not measured in this case. However, the integrated operating hours of the control power supply multiplied by the life expectancy coefficient defined by the temperature inside the inverter will be displayed. Hence, the hours displayed may not agree with the actual operating hours depending on the operational environment.

Since the integrated hours are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.

3) Life expectancy of cooling fan

The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are displayed. Since the integrated hours are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.

The displayed value should be considered as a rough estimate because the actual life of a cooling fan is influenced significantly by the temperature.

Table 8-2-2 Rough estimate of life expectancy using maintenance information

Parts Level of judgment

Capacitor in main circuit 85% or less of the initial value

Electrolytic capacitor on control PC board

61,000 hours

Cooling fan 40,000 hours (5HP or less), 25,000 hours (Over 7.5HP) (*1)

*1 Estimated life expectancy of a ventilation-fan at inverter ambient temperature of 40

°C (104°F)

8-3

8-3 Measurement of Main Circuit Electrical Quantity

The indicated values depend on the type of meter because the harmonic component is included in the voltage and current of the main circuit power (input) and the output (motor) side of the inverter. When measuring with a meter for commercial power frequency use, use the meters shown in Table 8.3.1.

The power-factor cannot be measured using power-factor meters currently available on the market, which measure the phase difference between voltage and current. When power-factors must be measured, measure the power, voltage, and current on the input side and output side, then calculate the power-factor using the following formula:

Power

− factor

= ×

100 [%]

3

×

[ ]

×

[ ]

Table 8-3-1 Meters for measuring main circuit

Input (power supply) side Output (motor) side

Item

Voltage Current* Voltage Current

Meter name

Ammeter

A

R,S,T

Voltmeter

V

R,S,T

Powermeter

W

R,S,T

Ammeter

A

U,V,W

Voltmeter

V

U,V,W

Powermeter

W

U,V,W

Meter type

Moving-iron type

Rectifier or moving-iron type

Digital power meter

Moving-iron type

Rectifier type

Digital power meter

Symbo l

Note: When measuring the output voltage using a rectifier type meter, an error may occur.

Use a digital AC power meter to ensure accuracy.

DC link circuit voltage

(P(+) - N(-))

DC voltmeter

V

Moving-coil type

Fig 8-3-1 Connection of the meters

8-4

8-4 Insulation Test

Avoid testing an inverter with a megger because an insulation test is completed at the factory. If a megger test must be completed, proceed as described below. Use of an incorrect testing method may result in product damage.

If the specifications for the dielectric strength test are not followed, the inverter may be damaged.

If a dielectric strength test must be completed, contact your local distributor or nearest Fuji Electric sales office.

(1) Megger test for the main circuit

①

Use a 500V DC type megger and isolate the main power before commencing measurement.

②

If the test voltage is connected to the control circuit, remove all connection cables to the control circuit.

③

Connect the main circuit terminals using common cables as shown in Fig. 8-4-1.

④

Execute the megger test only between the common cables connected to the main circuit and the ground (terminal G).

⑤

A megger indicating 5M

Ω or more is normal. (This is the value measured with an inverter only.)

Fig. 8-4-1

Megger test

(2) Insulation test in the control circuit

A megger test and a dielectric strength test must not be performed in the control circuit. Prepare a high resistance range multimeter for the control circuit.

①

Remove all external cables from the control circuit terminals.

②

Conduct a continuity test between grounds. A result of 1M

Ω or more is normal.

(3) Exterior main circuit and sequence control circuit

Remove all cables from inverter terminals to ensure the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.

8-5 Parts Replacement

The life expectancy of a part depends on the type of part, the environment, and usage conditions. Parts should be replaced as shown in Table 8-5-1.

Table 8-5-1 Part replacement

Part name Standard period for

Cooling fan replacement

3 years

Smoothing capacitor

Comments

Exchange for a new part.

5 Exchange for a new part

(determine after checking).

Electrolytic capacitor on the

PC board

Fuse

Other parts

7 Exchange for a new PC

10 years board (determine after checking).

Exchange for a new part.

－

Determine after checking.

8-6 Inquiries about Products and Product Guarantee

(1) Inquiries

If there is damage, a fault in the product, or questions concerning the product, contact your local distributor or nearest Fuji Electric sales office:

a) Inverter type b) Serial No. (equipment serial number) c) Purchase date d) Inquiry details (e.g., damaged part, extent of damage, questions, status of fault)

8-5

(2) Product guarantee --- Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order.

When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials, please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract, catalog, specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below.

In addition, the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used, etc., and may require periodic inspection. Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company.

Furthermore, regarding purchased products and delivered products, we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products.

1. Free of Charge Warranty Period and Warranty Range

1-1 Free of charge warranty period

(1) The product warranty period is "3 years from the shipment date."

(2) However in cases where the use environment, conditions of use, use frequency and times, etc., have an effect on product life, this warranty period may not apply.

(3) Furthermore, the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric's Service Department is "6 month from the date that repairs are completed."

1-2 Warranty range

(1) In the event that breakdown occurs during the product's warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji

Electric, Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered. However, if the following cases are applicable, the terms of this warranty may not apply.

1) The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions, environment, handling or use methods, etc. which are not specified in the catalog, operation manual, specifications or other relevant documents.

2) The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji's product.

3) The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji's product, such as the customer's equipment or software design etc.

4) Concerning the Fuji's programmable products, the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company, or the results from using such a program.

5) The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric.

6) The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables, etc. specified in the operation manual or catalog, etc.

7) The breakdown was caused by a chemical or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered.

8) The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used.

9) The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company's responsibility, such as lightning or other disaster.

(2) Furthermore, the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone.

(3) The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item (1) above and any damages (damage to or loss of machinery or equipment, or lost profits from the same, etc.) consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty.

1-3. Trouble diagnosis

As a rule, the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis. However, at the customer's request, this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis. In this case, the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company's fee schedule.

2. Exclusion of Liability for Loss of Opportunity, etc.

Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period, this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity, loss of profits, or damages arising from special circumstances, secondary damages, accident compensation to another company, or damages to products other than this company's products, whether foreseen or not by this company, which this company is not be responsible for causing.

3. Repair Period after Production Stop, Spare Parts Supply Period (Holding Period)

Concerning models (products) which have gone out of production, this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. In addition, we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. However, if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to produce or produce those parts, there may be causes where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7-year period. For details, please confirm at our company's business office or our service office.

4. Transfer Rights

In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program, the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation.

5. Service Contents

The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs. Depending on the request, these can be discussed separately.

6. Applicable Scope of Service

Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products. Consult the local supplier or Fuji for detail separately.

8-6

9. Specifications

9-1 Standard Specifications

(1) Three-phase 230V series


[HP]

1/4 1/2 1 2 3 5 7.5

G11

Type

FRN[][][]G11S-2UX



Overload capability

Starting torque

Braking torque

(*3) [%]

Braking time [s]

Braking duty cycle [%ED]

Mass [lbs (kg)]

10 15 20 25 30

23

(10.5)

23

(10.5)

40 50 60 75 100

F25 F50 001 002 003 005 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100

0.59 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.3

1.5 3.0 5.0 8.0 11

150% of rated output current for 1 min.

200% of rated output current for 0.5 s

200% or more (under torque vector control)

150% or more 100% or more

10 5

6.7

17

5

9.9

25

13

33

18

46

10 5 3 5 3 2 3 2

4.9

(2.2)

4.9

(2.2)

5.5

(2.5)

8.4

(3.8)

8.4

(3.8)

8.4

(3.8)

13

(6.1)

13

(6.1)

22

(10)

23

59

29

74

Approx. 20%

22

(10)

34

87

45 57 71 85 112

115 145 180 215 283

125 150

125

137

346




Approx. 10 to 15%

64

(29)

No limit

No limit

79

(36)

97

(44)

101

(46)

154

(70)

254

(115)

-

-

-

-

P11

Type

FRN[][][]P11S-2UX

Rated capacity (*1)

[kVA]


Overload capability

Starting torque

Braking torque

(*3) [%]

Braking time [s]


Mass [lbs (kg)]

- - - - - - 010 015 020 025 030 040

- - - - - - 8.7

- - - - - - 22


Approx. 20%

11

29

3-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V,220V,230V/60Hz

13

(5.7)

16

42

13

(5.7)

21

55

No limit

No limit

22

(10)

27

68

50% or more

22

(10)

31

23

(10.5)

64

(29)

64

(29)

060 100

45 57 71 85

79

(36)

97

(44)

112

80 115 145 180 215 283

Approx. 10 to 15%

101

(46)

125 150

137 165

346 415

154

(70)

254

(115)

Rated output voltage (*4) [V]

Rated output frequency [Hz]



Momentary voltage dip capability (*7)

Required power supply capacity (*8)[kVA]

50,60Hz

3-phase, 200 to 230V, 50/60Hz

3-phase, 200 to 220V/50Hz


Voltage: +10% to -15% (Imbalance rate between phases: 2% or less (*6) , Frequency: +5% to -5%

Operation will continue with 165V or more. If voltage drops below 165V, operation will continue for up to 15 ms.

If "Continuous operation" is selected, the output frequency will be lowered to withstand the load until normal voltage is resumed.

0.4 0.6 1.1 2.0 2.9

4.9

6.9

9.4

14 19 23 28 38 47 57 69 95 114 139

9-1

(2) Three-phase 460V series


G11

Type

FRN[][][]G11S-4UX



Overload capability

Starting torque

F50 001 002 003 005 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

1.1 1.9 2.9 4.3 7.1 10 14 19 23 31 35 47 59 72 89 119 140 167 201 242 300 330 414 466 517 589

1.5 2.5 3.7 5.5 9 13 18 24 30 39 45 60 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740




50% or more 100% or more 20% or more




10 to 15%

-

-

-

Braking torque

(*3) [%]

Braking time [s]


5 5

5 3 5 3 2 3 2

No limit

-

-

-

Mass [lbs (kg)] 4.9

(2.2)

5.5

(2.5)

8.4

(3.8)

8.4

(3.8)

8.4

(3.8)

14

(6.5)

14

(6.5)

22

(10)

22

(10)

23

(10.5)

23

(10.5)

64

(29)

75

(34)

86

(39)

88

(40)

106

(48)

154

(70)

154

(70)

220

(100)

220

(100)

309

(140)

309

(140)

705

(320)

705

(320)

904

(410)

904

(410)

-

P11

Type

FRN[][][]P11S-4UX

Rated capacity (*1)

[kVA]


Overload capability

Starting torque

Braking torque

(*3) [%]

Braking time [s]


Mass [lbs (kg)]

- - - - - 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800


Approx. 20%

50% or more

No limit

No limit

13

(6.1)

13

(6.1)

22

(10)

22

(10)

23

(10.5)

64

(29)

64

(29)

75

(34)

86

(39)

88

(40)

3-phase, 380V, 400V, 415V(440V)/50Hz, 380V, 400V, 440V, 460V/60Hz

106

(48)

Approx. 10 to 15%

154

(70)

154

(70)

220

(100)

220

(100)

309

(140)

309

(140)

309

(140)

705

(320)

705

(320)

904

(410)

904

(410)

Rated output voltage(*4) [V]

Rated output frequency [Hz]

50,60Hz



Momentary voltage dip capability (*7)

Required power supply capacity (*8)[kVA]

3-phase,380 to 480V,50/60Hz 3-phase, 380 to 440V/50Hz *5)


Voltage: +10% to -15% (Imbalance rate between phases: 2% or less (*6) , Frequency: +5% to -5%

Operation will continue with 310V or more. If voltage drops below 310V, operation will continue for up to 15 ms.

If "Continuous operation" is selected, the output frequency will be lowered to withstand the load until normal voltage is resumed.

0.6 1.1 2.1 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.4 14 19 24 28 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 549 610

(*1) Indicated capacities are at the rated output voltage 230V for the 230V series and 460V for the 460V series. The rated capacity will be lowered if the supply voltage is lowered.

(*2) In the case of a low impedance load, such as a high-frequency motor, the current may drop below the rated current.

(*3) Indicates when a nominal applied motor is used (the average torque when decelerated to stoppage from 60 Hz, which varies depending on motor loss).

(*4) An output voltage exceeding the supply voltage cannot be generated.

(*5) The taps within the inverter must be changed for a power supply rated at 380 to 398V/50 Hz or 380 to 430V/60 Hz.

(*6) If the imbalance between phases exceeds 2%, use a power-factor correcting DC reactor (DCR).

( Max. Voltage [V] - Min. Voltage [V] )

Imbalance rate between phases [%] = x 67[%]

3-phase average voltage [V]

(*7) Test was conducted under the standard load conditions stipulated by the JEMA committee (at the load equivalent to 85% of the nominal applied motor).

(*8) Indicates the values required when using a power-factor correcting DC reactor (DCR) (optional for inverters of 75HP or less) with a loaded nominal applied motor.

9-2

9-2 Common Specifications

Item Explanation

Control method

Maximum frequency

Base frequency

Starting frequency

Carrier frequency

Accuracy

(stability)

Sinusoidal wave PWM control (with V/F control, torque vector control, PG feedback vector control (option))

G11S: 50 to 400Hz variable setting P11S: 50-120Hz variable setting

G11S: 25 to 400Hz variable setting P11S: 25-120Hz variable setting

0.1 to 60Hz variable setting Holding time: 0.0 to 10.0 s

G11: 0.75 to 15kHz (75HP or less) 0.75 to 10kHz (100HP or more)

P11: 0.75 to 15kHz (30HP or less) 0.75 to 10kHz (40 to 100HP) 0.75 to 6kHz (125HP or more)

Analog setting: +/- 0.2% or less of the max. Frequency (at 25℃ (77

Digital setting: +/- 0.01% or less of the max. Frequency (-10℃ (14

°F) +/- 10℃ (50°F))

°F) to +5℃ (122°F))

Setting resolution

Analog setting: 1/1000 of max. frequency (30HP or less) 1/3000 of max. frequency (40HP or more)

Digital setting: 0.01Hz (99.99Hz or less), 0.1Hz (100.0Hz or more)

Voltage/frequency characteristics

Torque boost

Accelerating/decelerating time

DC injection braking

Function equipped

Operation method

Output voltage at base frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (230V series) or 320 to 480V

(460V series).

Output voltage at max. frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (230V series) or 320 to 480V

(460V series).

Auto: Optimum control corresponding to the load torque.

Manual: 0.1 to 20.0 code setting (energy saving reduced torque, constant torque (strong), etc.)

0.01 to 3600s

Four accelerating and decelerating time settings are possible independent of each other by selecting digital input signals.

In addition to linear acceleration and deceleration, either S-shaped acceleration/deceleration (weak/strong) or curvilinear acceleration/deceleration can be selected.

Starting frequency: 0.0 to 60.0Hz, braking time: 0.0 to 30.0s,

Braking level: 0 to 100% (G11S), 0-80% (P11S)

Frequency upper and lower limiter, bias frequency, frequency gain, jump frequency, pick-up operation, restart after momentary power failure, switching operation from line to inverter, slip compensation control, automatic energy saving operation, regeneration avoiding control, droop control, torque limiting (2-step), torque control, PID control, second motor switching, cooling fan ON/OFF control.

REV

Terminal input: Forward/stop command, reverse/stop command, coast-to-stop command, alarm reset, acceleration/deceleration selection, multistep frequency selection, etc.

Frequency setting

Operation status signal

External potentiometer: External freq.setting POT (VR) (1 to 5kΩ)

Analog input: 0 to +10V (0 to +5V), 4 to 20mA, 0 to +/- 10V (FWD/REV operation)

+10 V to 0 (reverse operation), 20 to 4mA (reverse operation)

UP/DOWN control: Frequency increases or decreases as long as the digital input signal is turned on.

Multistep frequency selection: Up to 15 steps are selectable by a combination of digital input signals (four kinds).

Link operation: Operation by RS-485 (standard).

Program operation: Pattern operation by program

REV

Transistor output (4 signals): Running, frequency arrival, frequency detection, overload early warning, etc.

Relay output (2 signals): Alarm output (for any fault), multi-purpose relay output signals

Analog output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output voltage, output torque, power consumption, etc.

Pulse output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output power, output torque, power consumption, etc.

Digital display (LED)

Liquid crystal display (LCD)

Language

Lamp display

Output frequency, setting frequency, output current, output voltage, motor synchronous speed, line speed, load rotation speed, calculated torque value, power consumption, calculated PID value, PID command value, PID feedback value, alarm code

Operation information, operational guide, functional code/name/setting data, alarm information, tester function, motor load rate measuring function (Maximum/average current (rms) during measuring period, maintenance information (Integrated operation hours, capacitance measurement for main circuit capacitors, heat sink temperature, etc.))

Six languages (Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian)

Charging (voltage residual), operation indication

Protective functions

Overcurrent, short-circuit, ground fault, overvoltage, undervoltage, overload, overheating, blown fuse, motor overload, external alarm, input open-phase, output open-phase (when tuning), braking resistor protection, CPU and memory error, keypad panel communication error, PTC thermistor protection, surge protection, stall prevention, etc.

Installation location

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Air pressure

Vibration

Storage

Indoor, altitude less than 3300ft (1000m), free from corrosive gas, dust, and direct sunlight (Pollution degree 2)

-10℃ (14

°F) to +50℃ (122°F) (ventilating cover must be removed under conditions exceeding +40℃ (104°F) for models rated at 30HP or less)

5 to 95%RH (no condensation)

Operation/storage :86 to 106 kPa

Transport :70 to 106 kPa

0.12inch(3mm) at from 2 to less than 9Hz, 9.8m/s

2m/s

2

at from 20 to less than 55Hz, 1m/s

2

2

at from 9 to less than 20Hz,

at from 55 to less than 200Hz,

Ambient temperature

-25℃ (-13

°F) to +65℃ (149°F)

Ambient humidity 5 to 95%RH (no condensation)

9-3

9-3 Outline Dimensions

■ Outline Dimensions (30HP or less)

4.33(110

)

0.28(7) 3.78(96) 0.28(7)

0.24(6)

0.28(7)

5.90(150

)

5.35(136

)

0.28(7) inch (mm)

5.70(145)

2.42(61.5)

0.24(6)

0.24(6)

0.61(15.5)

1.56(39.5) 0.61(15.5)

0.31(8)

0.24(6)

1.73

(44)

1.22

(31)

1.22

(31)

0.31(8)

3.43(87)

3.74(95)

4.29(109)

FRNF25G11S-2UX to

FRNF50G11S-2UX

FRNF50G11S-4UX

FRN001G11S-2UX

FRN001G11S-4UX

5.12

(130)

5.71

(145)

1.44

(36.5)

2.03

(51.5)

FRNF25G11S-2UX to FRN001G11S-2UX

FRNF50G11S-4UX to FRN001G11S-4UX

3.15

(80)

3.74

(95)

3.70

(94)

4.29

(109)

2.82

(71.5)

3.41

(86.5)

FRN002G11S-2UX to FRN005G11S-2UX


0.47(12)

9.84(250

)

8.90(226

)

0.47(12)

7.68(195)

4.17

(106)

0.39(10)

0.47(12)

8.66(220

)

7.72(196) 0.47(12)

7.68(195

)

4.09(104)

0.39(10)

φ1.10(28)

0.39(10)

2.28

(58)

1.81

(46)

2.07

(52.5)

0.31(8)

2-φ1.38(35)

5.49(139.5)

5.67(144)

6.26(159)

φ1.38(35)

2.54

(64.5)

2.17

(55)

2.42

(61.5)

0.39

(10)

0.31(8)

2-φ1.73(44)

5.06(128.5)

5.12(130)

6.26(159)



FRN007P11S-2UX to FRN015P11S-2UX


9-4





■ Outline Dimensions (G11S :40HP to 350HP, P11S :40HP to 450HP)

W

W3

W1

2or3-φC

D1

D

D2

4-φ18

吊り穴

W

W3

W1

2or3-φC

D1

D2

4-φ18

吊り穴

C

取付寸法

W3

W1

4or6mounting hole

取付ボルト

C

4or6- mounting

W2

W1 hole

取付ボルト

W3

230V Series

Nominal applied

Inverter type motor[HP] FRN-G11S series

FRN-P11S series W W1 W2

Dimension Unit inch (mm)

W3 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D

50

60

75

－

－

FRN040P11S-2UX 9.45

FRN050P11S-2UX

FRN050G11S-2UX －

FRN060P11S-2UX

FRN060G11S-2UX

－

－ 14.8

10.8

(275)

FRN075G11S-2UX －

12.8

(326)

14.2

(361)

－

21.7

(550)

24.2

(615)

29.1

(740)

20.9

(530)

23.4

(595)

28.3

(720)

19.7

(500)

22.2

(565)

27.2

(690)

20.2

(512)

22.7

(577)

27.6

(702)

0.47

(12)

0.98

(25)

0.35

10.0

(255)

(9) 10.6

(270)

D1

5.71

(145)

D2

0.16

(4)

100

125

－ FRN100P11S-2UX

FRN100G11S-2UX

－

－ 20.9

16.9

(430)

20.1

(510)

29.5

(750)

28.3

(720)

27.0

(685)

27.4

(695)

150

FRN125G11S-2UX

－

－

26.8

22.8

(580)

26.0

(660)

11.4

(290)

34.6

(880)

33.5

(850)

32.1

(815)

32.5

(825)

0.61

(15.5)

1.28

(32.5)

0.49

11.2

(285)

(12.5) 14.2

(360)

5.71

(145)

8.66

(220)

460V Series

Nominal applied


FRN-P11S series W W1 W2


W3 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D D1 D2

50

60

75

100

125

150

200

－

FRN040P11S-4UX 9.45

FRN050P11S-4UX

FRN050G11S-4UX －

－

FRN060P11S-4UX

FRN060G11S-4UX

－

FRN075P11S-4UX

FRN075G11S-4UX

－

－

14.8

(375)

10.8

(275)

－ FRN100P11S-4UX

FRN100G11S-4UX

－

－ FRN125P11S-4UX

FRN125G11S-4UX －

－

FRN150P11S-4UX

FRN150G11S-4UX

－

FRN200P11S-4UX

FRN200G11S-4UX

－

－

20.9

(530)

16.9

(430)

250

300

350

－ FRN250P11S-4UX

FRN250G11S-4UX

－

－ FRN300P11S-4UX

FRN300G11S-4UX －

－

FRN350P11S-4UX

FRN350G11S-4UX

400

－

26.8

22.8

(580)

12.8

(326)

14.2

(361)

20.1

(510)

26.0

(660)

－

11.4

(290)

21.7

(550)

26.6

(675)

29.1

(740)

29.1

(740)

39.4

(1000)

20.9

(530)

25.8

(655)

28.3

(720)

28.0

(710)

38.2

(970)

19.7

(500)

24.6

(625)

27.2

(690)

26.6

(675)

36.8

(935)

20.2

(512)

25.1

(637)

27.6

(702)

27.0

(685)

37.2

(945)

0.47

(12)

0.61

(15.5)

0.98

(25)

1.28

(32.5)

0.35

0.49

(12.5)

10.0

(255)

(9) 10.6

(270)

12.4

(315)

14.2

(360)

5.71

(145)

6.89

(175)

8.66

(220)

0.16

(4)

450 FRN450P11S-4UX

C

0.39

(10)

0.59

(15)

C

0.39

(10)

0.59

(15)

Mounting bolt

M8

M12

Mounting bolt

M8

M12

9-5

■ Outline Dimensions (G11S :400HP or more ,P11S :500HP or more)

W

W1

W3 W4

D1

D

D2

D1

D2

D1

D2

L ifting bolts

W5

C

W1

W3 W4

Holes for fixing bolts

W3

W2

W1

W4


W3

W2

W1

W4


Mounting dimensions of internal mounting type

Mounting dimensions of external cooling type

460V Series

Nominal applied


FRN-P11S series


W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5

400 FRN400G11S-4UX

450 FRN450G11S-4UX

500 －

－ 26.8 22.8

(580)

600 － FRN600P11S-4UX

500 FRN500G11S-4UX －

600 FRN600G11S-4UX

700

－

－ 34.6 30.7

(780)

800 － FRN800P11S-4UX

26.0

(660)

33.9

(860)

11.4

(290)

10.2

(260)

－

10.2

(260)

24.0

(610)

31.9

(810)

H H1

55.1

(1400)

53.9

(1370)

H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7

52.4

(1330)

52.8

(1340)

52. 6

(1335)

0.61

(15.5)

1.38

(35)

0.57

(14.5)

D

17.7

(450)

Nominal applied


FRN-P11S series D2


D3 D4 D5 D6 C

400 FRN400G11S-4UX

450 FRN450G11S-4UX －

500 － FRN500P11S-4UX

600 － FRN600P11S-4UX

500 FRN500G11S-4UX －

(6.4)

1.97

(50)

600 FRN600G11S-4UX

700

－

－

FRN700P11S-4UX

800

－

FRN800P11S-4UX

3.94

(100)

1.38

(35)

4.53

(115)

0.59

(15)

Mounting bolt

M12

D1

11.2

(285)

9-6

■ Outline Dimensions (Keypad panel) ■ Outline Dimensions (Reactor; Accessories for 100HP or more)

Fig. A

MA X. E terminal hole

F± 5

Fig. B

MA X. E F± 5

B± 1

A± 3

図 B

4-ø G terminal hole

C ±2

D ±3

E ±5

MAX.F

B± 1

A± 3

230V Series

Inverter type

4-ø G terminal hole

C ± 2

D ± 3

7.48

(190)

6.30

(160)

4.53

(115)

4.92

(125)

7.87

(200)

8.27

(210)

6.69

(170)

7.09

(180)

5.31

(135)

8.66

(220)

7.48

(190)

9.45

(240)

10.2

(260)

8.27

(210)

8.86

(225)

5.71

(145)


5.94

(151)

6.34

(161)

3.94

(100)

4.72

(120)

6.73

(171)

7.13

(181)

5.51

(140)

2.95

(75)

3.15

(80)

3.35

(85)

3.54

(90)

5.91

(150)

6.30

(160)

6.69

(170)

3.74

(95)

7.28

(185)

3.94

(100)

0.39

(10)

0.47

(12)

9.45

(240)

9.84

(250)

10.2

(260)

11.4

(290)

11.6

(295)

11.8

(300)

12.6

(320)

13.4

(340)

10.6

(270)

— — —

11.0

(280)

0.98

(25)

— —

12.6

(320)

13.0

(330)

13.8

(350)

14.6

(370)

—

—

—

—

—

1.18

(30)

1.57

(40)

1.97

(50)

— —

— —

1.61

(41)

8.46

(215)

1.77

(45)

8.86

(225)

M10

φ

12

φ

15

Mass

[lbs]

(kg)

44

(20)

50

(23)

55

(25)

62

(28)

71

(32)

77

(35)

88

(40)

99

(45)

115

(52)

121

(55)

132

(60)

148

(67)

154

(70)

9-7

20

B± 1

A± 3

4-ø G×20 長穴 terminal hole

C±2

DC Reactor type Fig.

FRN100G11S/P11S-2UX DCR2-75B Fig. A

FRN125G11S/P11S-2UX DCR2-90B

Fig. B

FRN150P11S-2UX DCR2-110B

460V Series

Inverter type DC Reactor type Fig.


Fig. A





Fig. B



FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN450P11S-4UX

DCR4-280B

FRN450G11S-4UX DCR4-315B



Fig. C



7.87

(200)

7.09

(180)

7.48

(190)

6.69

(170)

5.91

(150)

6.30

(160)

3.94

(100)

4.33

(110)

4.72

(120)


5.55

(141)

5.94

(151)

6.34

(161)

4.33

(110)

5.51

(140)

5.91

(150)

2.76

(70)

2.95

(75)

3.15

(80)

0.39

(10)

8.27

(210)

9.45

(240)

10.6

(270)

10.6

(270)

11.0

(280)

13.0

(330)

— — —

0.98

(25)

— —

M12

φ 15

Mass

[lbs]

(kg)

40

(18)

44

(20)

55

(25)

9-4 RS-485 Modbus RTU Serial Communications

The serial interface supports operation, configuration and monitoring of inverter functions through an

EIA/RS-485 connection. The serial interface is based on Modbus RTU protocol. This protocol allows the inverter to function as an RTU slave on an industrial network.

9-4-1 Transmission Specification

Item Specification

Physical level

Transmission distance

Number of nodes

Transmission speed

Transmission mode

Transmission protocol

Character code

Character length

Error check

EIA/RS-485

1600 ft (500 m)

32 total

19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 [bits/s]

Half duplex

Modbus RTU

Binary

8 bits

CRC

9-4-2 Connection

Connection method

Use shielded wire and connect to the control terminals (DX-, DX+ and SD). A termination resistor should be added between the data lines on the each end of the network. The value of the termination resistor depends on the characteristic impedance of the cable. A common value for termination resistors is 120 ohms.

Control terminals

Terminal marking

DX+

DX-

Terminal name

RS-485 communication data (+)

RS-485 communication data (–)

Function description

Input/output terminals for RS-485 communication.

9-4-3 Serial Interface Configuration

Inverter function codes H30 to H39 are used to configure the serial interface parameters, such as device address, baud rate and error response.

9-4-4 Modbus RTU Functions

The following RTU functions are supported. The maximum number of consecutive parameters for function

03 and 16 messages is 16.

Code Description

03 Read Holding Registers (16 registers maximum)

06

16

Preset Single Register

Preset Multiple Registers (16 registers maximum)

9-8

9-4-5 Inverter Function Code Access

All of the inverter function codes are accessible through the RS-485 serial interface. Inverter function codes are mapped to RTU holding registers. An inverter function code RTU address is 2 bytes in length. The high byte corresponds to a code that represents the inverter parameter sort (F

–M). The low byte corresponds to the inverter parameter number within the sort (0 -99).

Code Sort

0 F

Name

Basic function

Code

5

Sort

A

Name

Motor 2 function

3

4

P

H

Motor 1 function

High level function

8 M Monitor data

For example, inverter function code M11, output current, is addressed as RTU parameter number 080B hexadecimal or 2059 decimal. high byte low byte inverter parameter sort code inverter parameter number

9-4-6 Command and Monitor Data Registers

The command and monitor function codes are used to control the operation of the inverter and monitor the status variables through the serial interface. The command and monitor function codes are not accessible from the inverter keypad interface. Inverter parameter H30 and digital input signal LE must be enabled to operate the inverter from the Modbus interface. If LE is not assigned to a digital input (X1-X9), the signal will default to ON.

Frequency Setting Registers

Address Code Name Unit Variable Range Min. unit

Read/

Write

Data

Format command - –20000

(max. frequency at

± 20000)

1 R/W 2

Address Code

Frequency 0.00

R/W

Name Unit Variable Range Min. unit

5

Note:

1) If both S01 and S05 are set, the inverter will ignore the setting of S05.

2) A data setting that exceeds the setting range is possible, but the actual action will be limited by the inverter configuration.

Operation command data Registers

Read/

Write

Data

Format

1798 S06 Operation command - Refer to the data format [14] - R/W

1799 S07 Universal Do - Refer to the data format [15]

- –20000

(100% output at

± 20000 )

- R/W

1 R/W

Note:

1) Since X1

–X9 are configurable input commands, it is necessary to set the functions by E01–E09.

2) The alarm reset is executed, when RST signal changes from ON to OFF even if there are no alarms.

3) Universal Do is a function that utilizes the inverter

’s digital outputs via communication.

Function data Registers

Address Code Name Unit Variable Range

1800 S08 Acceleration F07

0.1

–3600.0

1801 S09 Deceleration time F08 s

0.1

–3600.0

1802 S10

1803 S11

Torque limit level 1

(driving) F40

Torque limit level 2

(braking) F41

%

20.00

–200.00, 999

(P11S:20.00-150.00)

%

0.00, 20.00

–200.00, 999

(P11S:20.00-150.00)

Note:

1) The writing of data out of range is treated as out of range error.

2) Use a value of 7FFF

H

to enter 999 for torque limit functions.

Min. unit

Read/

Write

0.1 R/W

0.1 R/W

1.00 R/W

1.00 R/W

14

15

2

Data

Format

3

3

5

5

9-9

Monitoring parameter registers

Address Code

2054

2055

2056

2059

2060

2061

M06

Description

Frequency

(final command)

Frequency

(final command)

Actual frequency

M07 Actual torque value

Unit Range

Data

Format

- -

–20000

(max. frequency at

± 20000)

Hz 0.00

–400.00

0.01 R [5]

(P11S:0.00-120.00)

- - 20000

–20000

(max. frequency at

± 20000)

% - 200.00

–200.00 0.01

M08 Torque current % - 200.00

[6] electric

Hz 0.00

–400.00

(P11S:0.00-120.00)

%

0.01 R [5]

[5]

M11

M12

Output current r. m. s.

Output voltage r. m. s.

% 0.00

–200.00 (inverter rating at 100.00)

0.01 R [5]

V 0.0

[3]

- Refer to data format [14] - R [14]

2062

2063

M13 Operation command (final command)

M14 Operating state

M15 Universal output terminal data

-

-

Refer to data format [16]


- Refer to data format [10]

-

-

-

R

R

R

[16]

[15]

[10]

2069

2071

2072

M21

M23

M24

DC link voltage

Type code

Inverter capacity code

V

-

-

0 [1]

0



-

-

R

R

[1]

[17]

[11]

0 [1]

Transmission processing code

2075

2079

2080

2081

M27 Frequency command at alarm (final command)

M31 Frequency command at alarm (final command)

M32 Actual frequency at alarm

M33 Actual torque at alarm

- Refer to data format [20]

- -

–20000 (max. frequency at

±20000 )

Hz 0.00

–400.00

(P11S:0.00-120.00)

- - 20000

–20000

(max. frequency at

± 20000)

% - 200.00

– 200.00

% - 200.00

– 200.00

- R [20]

0.01 R [5]

0.01 R [6]

2082 M34 Torque current at alarm 0.01 R [6]

2083

2084

2085

Output value at alarm

2087

2088

M35 Output frequency at alarm Hz 0.00

– 400.00

(P11S:0.00-120.00)

M36 Motor output at alarm

(input power)

M37 Output current r.m.s. at

M39 alarm

Operation command at alarm

M40 Operating state at alarm

% 0.00

– 200.00 (inverter rating at 100.00)

-

-



0.01 R [5]

0.01 R [5]

1.0

-

-

R

R

R

[5]

[3]

[14]

[16]

2089 M41 Universal output terminal data at alarm

Integrated at alarm

2091 M43 DC link voltage at alarm

2092

2093

2094

2095

2096

- Refer to data format [15] h 0

- R [15]

[1]

V 0 [1]

M44 Inverter internal air temp.at alarm

°C

0 [1]

M45 Cooling fin temp. at alarm

°C

0 [1]

M46 Life of main circuit capacitor.

M47 Life of printed circuit board capacitor.

M48 Life of cooling fan.

% 0.0

[3] h 0 h 0

[1]

[1]

9-10

9-4-7 Data Format Specification

All data in the data field of communication frame shall be represented by a 16 bit length word.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

16 bits binary data

Data format [1]

Example data = -20

-20 = FFEC

H

Data format [3]

Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 1

Example If F15 (Frequency limit, upper)= 60Hz

60 = 003C

H

Data format [2] Integer data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 1

Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.1

Example: If F17 (frequency gain setting signal) = 100.0%

100.0 X 10 = 1000 = 03E8

H

Data format [4] Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.1

Example If: C31 (Analog input offset adjust, terminal12) = - 5.0%

- 5.0 X 10= - 50 = FFCE

H

Data format [5] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.01

Example: If C05 (multi-step frequency 1) = 50.25Hz

50.25 X 100 = 5025 = 13A1

H


Example: If M07 (actual torque value)= - 85.38%

- 85.38 X 100= - 8538=DEA6

H

Data format [7] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.001

Example: If o05 (follow - up side ASR 1 constant) = 0.105s

0.105 X 1000 = 105 = 0069

H


Example: Data = -1.234

- 1.234 X 1000 = - 1234 = FB2E

Data format [9]

H

Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 2

Example If P01 (Motor 1 number of poles) =2pole

2 = 0002

H

9-11

Data format [10]

6

7

8

0

1

2

3

11

14

Alarm Code

No alarm

Overcurrent, during acceleration (INV output )

Overcurrent, during deceleration (INV output )

Overcurrent, during steady state operation

(INV output )

Overvoltage, during acceleration

Over voltage, during deceleration

Overvoltage, during steady state operation

Power supply open phase

Blown DC fuse

17

18

19

Overheat, heat sink, inverter

Overheat, outside thermal

Overheat, unit inside temp.

Data format [11] Capacity code

-

OC1

OC2

EF 27 Overspeed

OU1 28 PG wire break

OU2

OU3

31

32

Memory error

Keypad error

LU 33 CPU

Lin

FUS

34

35

Option comm. error

Option error

OH1

OH2

OH3

22

23

24

37

38

Overheat, DB resistor

Overload, motor 1 dbH

OL1

Overload, motor 2 OL2

Overload, OLU

Output wiring error

RS-485 comm. error

OS

Pg

Er1

Er2

Er3

Er4

Er5

Er6

Er7

Er8

7 0.07(spare) 20 17500 175

15 0.15(spare) 2500 25 20000 200

500 5 10000 100 50000 500

750 7.5 12500 125 60600 600

1000 10 15000 150 60700 700

1500 15 60800 800

Data format [12] Index data (ACC/DEC time, display coefficient)

Polarity 0 0 0 portion Data portion

0: Positive (+),

1: Negative ( - )

0: 0.01 X

2: 1 X

001

–999 (0.00–9.99)

X

–999

(10.0

–99.9)

100

–999 (100–999)

X

–999 (1000–9990)

Example: If F07 (acceleration time 1) = 20.0 s

10.0 < 20< 99.9 → index =1

20.0 = 0.1 X 200 → 0400

H

+ 00C8

H

= 04C8

H

9-12

Data format [13] Pattern operation

Direction of rotation

0 Time Index portion Data portion

0: 1st ACC/DEC time

0: FWD 1: 2nd ACC/DEC time

1: REV 2: 3rd ACC/DEC time

3: 4th ACC/DEC time

0: 0.01 X

1: 0.1 X

2: 1

3: 10

X

X

001

–999 (0.00–9.99)

100

–999 (10.0–99.9)

100

–999 (100–999)

100

–999 (1000–9990)

Example) If C22 (Stage1) = 10.0s R2 (10s, reverse rotation, acceleration time 2/deceleration time 2)

Since 10.0 = 0.1 X 100 > 9000

H

+ 0400

H

+ 0064

H

= 9464

H

Data format [14] Operation command

RST 0 0 0 0 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD

(All bit are ON by 1)

Example If S06 (operation command) = FWD, X1 and X5 = ON

0000 0000 0100 0101 b

= 0045

H

Data format [15] Universal output terminal

(All bit are ON by 1)

Example) If M15 (Universal output terminal)=Y1 and Y5 = ON

0000 0000 0001 0001 b

= 0011

H

Data format [16] Operating state

ALM ACC

(All bit are ON or active by 1)

FWD: Forward operation

REV: Reverse operation

EXT: DC braking active (or pre-excitation)

INT: No Output

BRK: Braking active

NUV: DC link voltage is established

TL:

(undervoltage at 0)

Torque limiting

VL: Voltage limiting

TL BRK REV FWD

IL: Current limiting

ACC: Under acceleration

DEC: Under deceleration

RL: Transmission valid

WR: Function writing privilege

0: Keypad panel

1: RS-485

2: Fieldbus (option)

BUSY: Processing data write

9-13

Data format [17] Type code

2 G - -

-

-

6 - - -

Data format [18] Code setting (1

–4 figures)

-

Data 4 Data 3 Data 2

Data format [19] Amperage value Decimal data (positive ):

Min. unit 0.01 inverter capacity is not more than 30HP

Min unit 0.01 for not less than 40HP

Example) If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)107.0A (40HP)

107.0 X 10=1070=042E

H

If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)=3.60A (1HP)

Since 3.60 X 100=360=0168

H

Data format [20] Transmission error code

Code Description Code

1 FC (function code) error 71

Description

CRC error (no response)

2

3

Illegal address

Illegal address (Data range error)

72 Parity error (no response)

73 Other errors (no response)

-Framing error

-Overrun error

-Buffer full error

7 NAK

-Priority for comm.

-No privilege for writing error

-Forbidden writing error

Data 1

9-14

Data format [21] Auto tuning

0 0 0 0 0 0 FWD

0: Without forward rotation command

1: With forward rotation command.

0: Without reverse rotation command.

1: With reverse rotation command.

Example) If P04 (motor 1 auto - tuning)=1: Forward rotation

=0101

H

0000 0001 0000 0001 b

9-4-8 Communication Errors

Exception Response

When the inverter receives a message that does not contain communication errors but the message can not be processed, the inverter will return an exception response. The exception response contains an error sub-code in the data field that represents the problem.

Exception Response Errors

Sub-Code Name

1 Illegal Function

Causes

Received RTU Function other than 03, 06 or 16

2 Illegal Data Address • The starting parameter address is an unused inverter parameter.

• The starting parameter address plus the offset refers to inverter parameter greater than the last parameter in a Function Code sort.

3

7

Illegal Data Value

• The number of registers is greater than 16.

Data contains an out of range value for an inverter parameter

Negative Acknowledge • Requested data cannot be changed while the inverter is running.

• The inverter parameter function is owned by the network interface option card and cannot be changed.

Communication errors

Communication errors occur when the inverter receives an invalid message. The inverter will not return a response to a communication error. A code that represents the last communication error is stored in inverter parameter M26. Typical communication message errors include parity, framing, and CRC errors.

9-15

10. Options

10-1 Built-in Options

The inverter supports two internally mounted cards. One option card is mounted under the main cover

(Location A) and the other option card is mounted in a special adapter under the keypad (Location B). Only one card can be mounted in these locations. There are two different types of option cards, Type 1 and Type 2.

You cannot use two Type 1 or Two Type 2 cards but you can mix any combination of Type 1 and Type 2 provided you only have one option per mounting location. Each option card must be mounted in the designated location. The chart below lists the option card, their types, and their mounting locations.

OPC-G11S-RY

(Relay output card)

OPC-G11S-DIO

(Digital interface card)

OPC-G11S-AIO

(Analog interface card)

OPC-G11S-PG

(PG Feedback Card)

(G11S only)

OPC-G11S-PG2

(PG Feedback Card)

(G11S only)

Function

1 A 2/B • Relay output card

The transistor output from the inverter control output terminals Y1 and Y4 are converted to the relay output (1SPDT).

2 A None • Frequency setting by binary code (max. 16 bits)

• Monitoring (8 bits) of frequency, output current, and output voltage

2 A None • Auxiliary input for analog frequency setting (0 to

+/-10 V)

• Monitoring of inverter output frequency, current, and torque in analog voltage, analog output 0-10 VDC and 4-20mA

1 A 2/B • This will enable vector control by pulse generator feedback signal

• Proportional operation, tuning operation (12/15 V;

A, B Signal)

1 A 2/B • This will enable vector control by pulse generator feedback signal

• Proportional operation, tuning operation (5V; A, not

A, B, not B Signals)

1 A 2/B • Two motors are driven synchronously. OPC-G11S-SY

(Synchronized operation card)

(G11S only)

OPC-G11S-PDP

(Communication card)

OPC-G11S-DEV


OPC-G11S-MBP


OPC-G11S-IBS


2 B 1/A • Serial communication card for Profibus-DP

2 B 1/A • Serial communication card for Device Net

2 B 1/A • Serial communication card for Modbus plus

2 B 1/A • Serial communication card for Interbus-S

10-1

10-2 Separately Installed Options

Name (Type)

Arrester

Explanation

Absorbs power surges from the power source and protects the whole equipment connected to the power source.

EMC compliance filter

(FS5536-[][]-07)

（ EFL-[][]SP-2）

(EFL-[][][]G11-4 )

(RF3[][][]-F11)

Output circuit filter

An exclusive filter to conform to the EMC Directive

(emissions) in European standard.

Note: Refer to the "Installation Manual" when installing the filter.

Include an output circuit filters in the inverter power output

(secondary) circuit to:

1) Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor input terminals.

This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents by the 400 V class of inverters.

2) Suppress leakage current from the power output lines (due to harmonic components).

This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long power feed lines. It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept to less than 400 m.

3) Minimize emission and/or induction noise issued from the power output lines.

Output circuit filters are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines, such as those used in plants, etc.

Note: Use an output circuit filter within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26 (Motor sound (Carrier frequency)). Otherwise, the filter will overheat.

DC reactor

(DCR2-[][][])

(DCR4-[][][])

(For power coordination)

①

Used when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500kVA and exceeds the rated capacity of the inverter tenfold.

②

Used when a thyristor converter is connected as a common load on the same transformer.

- If the commutating reactor is not used for the thyristor converter, an AC reactor is necessary at the inverter input side. Confirm.

③

Used to prevent an inverter OV trip from occurring when the phase advanced capacitor in the power line is switched on and off.

④ Used when the voltage imbalance exceeds 2%.

Voltage unbalance [%]

( Max. Voltage [V] - Min. Voltage [V] )

= x67%

3-phase average voltage [V]

Power supply capacity

M

Motor

Thyristor converter

Series connected reactor

Power-factor improving capacitor

(For improving the input power-factor and reducing harmonics)

Used to reduce the harmonic current (improvement of power-factor).

* For details on the degree of reduction, see the materials attached to the guidelines, etc.

Surge absorber Absorbs external surges and noise and prevents malfunction of magnetic contactors, mini control relays and timers, etc.

Analog frequency meter Frequency meter

Frequency setting device

(VR)

Frequency setting variable resistor

10-2

Installation Position

Power supply

FAB or

R S T

U V W

P1

L1/R L2/S L3/T

P(+)

Inverter

U V W

R S T

U V W

M

Motor

11. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

11-1 General

In accordance with the provisions described in the European Commission Guidelines Document on Council

Directive 89/336/EEC,Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. has chosen to classify the FRENIC 5000G11S range of Inverters as "Complex Components".

Classification as a "Complex Components" allows a product to be treated as an "apparatus", and thus permits compliance with the essential requirements of the EMC Directive to be demonstrated to both an integrator of

FRENIC Inverters and to his customer or the installer and the user.

FRENIC Inverters is supplied `CE-marked', signifying compliance with EC Directive 89/336/EEC when fitted with specified filter units installed and earthed in accordance with this sheet.

This Specification requires the following performance criteria to be met.

EMC product standard EN61800-3/1997 +A11/2000

Immunity : Second environment ( Industrial environment )

Emission : First environment ( Domestic environment )

Distribution class of Emission

Unrestricted distribution Restricted distribution

Without OPC-G11S-***

FRN020G11S-4UX or less.

FRN025P11S-4UX or less.

Without OPC-G11S-***

FRN025G11S-4UX or more.

FRN030P11S-4UX or more.

FRN-G11S/P11S-2UX

With OPC-G11S-***

FRN-G11S-2UX/4UX all models with OPC-G11S-***.

Card option :OPC-G11S-AIO, DIO, PG, PG2, SY, RY, PGDIO,

PGRY

Bus option :OPC-G11S-PDP, DEV, MBP, IBS

WARNING

This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according to

IEC61800-3.

In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Finally, it is customer’s responsibility to check whether the equipment conforms to EMC directive.

11-1

11-2 Recommended Installation Instructions

It is necessary that to conformed to EMC Directive, these instructions must be followed.

Follow the usual safety procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical connections to the filter, Inverter and motor must be made by a qualified electrical technician.

1) Use the correct filter according to Table 11-1.

2) Install the Inverter and filter in the electrically shielded metal wiring cabinet.

3) The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter.

Care should be taken to remove any paint etc. from the mounting holes and face area of the panel. This will ensure the best possible earthing of the filter.

4) Use the screened cable for the control , motor and other main wiring which are connected to the Inverter, and these screens should be securely earthed.

5) It is important that all wire lengths are kept as short as possible and that incoming mains and outgoing motor cables are kept well separated.

" To minimize the conducted radio disturbance in the power distribution system, the length of the motor-cable should be as short as possible. "

Table 11-1 RFI filters

Applied Inverter Filter Type

Rated

Current

Max.

Rated

Voltage

Dimensions

LxWxH [inch (mm)]

RFI filter

Mount Dims

Y x X [inch (mm)]

Note

FS5536-5-07

(EFL-0.75G11-4)

5A

12.6(320)×4.57(116)×1.65(42) 11.54(293)×3.54(90)

FRNF50G11S-4UX

FRN001G11S-4UX

FRN002G11S-4UX

FRN003G11S-4UX

FRN005G11S-4UX

FRN007G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN010G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN015G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN020G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN025G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN030G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN100G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN200G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN300G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN450G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX

FRN700P11S-4UX

FRN800P11S-4UX

FS5536-12-07

(EFL-4.0G11-4)

FS5536-35-07

(EFL-7.5G11-4)

FS5536-50-07

(EFL-15G11-4)

FS5536-72-07

(EFL-22G11-4)

RF 3100-F11

RF 3180-F11

RF 3280-F11

RF 3400-F11

RF 3880-F11

+

F200160

12A

35A

50A

72A

100A

180A

280A

400A

880A

3ph

480Vac

3ph

480Vac

12.6(320)×6.10(155)×1.77 (45)

13.43(341)×8.86(225)×1.87(47.5)

11.54(293)×4.13(105)

12.24(311)×6.58(167)

19.69(500)×9.84(250)×2.76(70) 17.68(449)×7.28(185)

19.69(500)×9.84(250)×2.76(70) 17.68(449)×7.28(185)

17.13(435)×7.87(200)×5.12(130)

19.49(495)×7.87(200)×6.30(160)

9.84(250)×23.11(587)×8.07(205)

9.84(250)×23.11(587)×8.07(205)

27.09(688)×14.33(364)×7.09(180)

16.06(408)×6.54(166)

18.43(468)×6.54(166)

22.05(560)×3.35(85)

22.05(560)×3.35(85)

25.51(648)×5.90(150)

Fig.

11-1

Fig.

11-2

Fig.

11-3

Fig.

11-4

11-2

Fig.11-1

RF3100-F11

RF3180-F11

Dimensions [inch(mm)]

W W1 H H1 D

7.87

(200)

7.87

(200)

6.54

(166)

6.54

(166)

17.1

(435)

19.5

(495)

16.1

(408)

18.4

(468)

5.12

(130)

6.30

(160)

Fig.11-2 Outline Dimensions (RF3100-F11, RF3180-F11)

11-3

23.1 (587)

22.0 (560)

Fig.11-3 Outline Dimensions (RF3280-F11, RF3400-F11)

27.1 (688)

25.5 (648)

Fig.11-4 Outline Dimensions (RF3880-F11)

11-4

3ph

Power supply

RCD or

MCCB

Metal wiring cabinet

RFI filter

L1 L1

L2 L2

L3 L3

PE PE

( )

230V Series 30HP or less Only

Fit a ferrite ring to the motor cable with the 3 phase conductors only passing through the center of the ferrite.

Inverter

Ferrite

Ring

Screened Motor Cable

L1/R U

L2/S V

L3/T W

M

Screening must be electrically continuous and earthed at the cabinet and the motor.

Motor

Fig.11-5

FRNF25G11S-2UX to FRN125G11S-2UX , FRN007P11S-2UX to FRN150P11S-2UX

FRNF50G11S-4UX to FRN350G11S-4UX , FRN007P11S-4UX to FRN450P11S-4UX

Metal wiring cabinet

RCD or

MCCB

RFI filter

DCR

Fit a ferrite ring to the cable with conductors passing through the center of the ferrite.

Screened Motor Cable

L1 L1

L2 L2

L3 L3

PE PE

P1 P(+)

L1/R U

L2/S V

L3/T W

Inverter

Screening must be electrically continuous and earthed at the cabinet and the motor.

M

Motor

3ph

Power supply

Fit a ferrite ring to the cable with conductors passing through the center of the ferrite.

Fig.11-6


FRN500P11S-4UX to FRN800G11S-4UX

11-5

11-3 The harmonics restriction in Europe Union (EU)

Combinations of the inverter with DC-reactor in table 11-2 fulfill the harmonics requirements of the EN

61000-3-2(+A14), which are European EN standard.

However these inverters without DC-reactor don’t fulfill them. If they shall be connected to the public low voltage power supply system, the supply authority must be asked for permission to connect.

Fuji Electric can provide this data sheets when you need the data for harmonics currents.

Table 11-2

Inverter model name Applied DC-reactor model name Power supply

DCRE4-0.4 Three-phase

FRN001G11S-4UX DCR4-0.75 or DCRE4-0.75

460V

User A

Public MV/LV

Transformer

Inverter

1kW or less

User B

Middle voltage power supply system

Public low voltage

Power supply system

User C

Inverter

1kW or less

This inverter must fulfill EN61000-3-2+A14 requirements or permission of the power supply authority is required if it doesn’t fulfill.

Own MV/LV

Transformer

Industrial low voltage

Power supply system

This inverter doesn’t need to fulfill

EN61000-3-2+A14 requirements.

No standard of harmonic current exists for the present.

11-6

App. Inverter Generating Loss

FRENIC 5000G11 Watts Loss FRENIC 5000P11 Watts Loss

Watts Loss [W] Watts Loss [W]

Model

Low carrier frequency

High carrier frequency

FRNF25G11S-2UX 25 30

*1


*1

FRN001G11S-2UX 50 60

*1

FRN002G11S-2UX 80 110

Model

Low carrier frequency

High carrier frequency

210 280

290 370

410 550

*1

FRN020P11S-2UX 500 670

*1

*1

*1

*1

FRN003G11S-2UX 110 140

FRN005G11S-2UX 170 210

FRN007G11S-2UX 240 310

FRN010G11S-2UX 300 415

FRN015G11S-2UX 450 620

*1

*1

*1

FRN025P11S-2UX 630 840

FRN030P11S-2UX 770 1030

FRN040P11S-2UX 950 1100

*1

*1

*2

*1

FRN050P11S-2UX

*2

*1

*1

FRN060P11S-2UX

FRN075P11S-2UX

*2

*2

FRN020G11S-2UX 540 720

FRN025G11S-2UX 670 890

*1

FRN030G11S-2UX 880 1160

*1

FRN040G11S-2UX 950 1200

*1

FRN100P11S-2UX

FRN125P11S-2UX 2650 2800

FRN150P11S-2UX 3200 3350

*2

*3

*3

FRN050G11S-2UX 1200 1550

*1

FRN060G11S-2UX 1400 1750

*1

FRN007P11S-4UX 160 290

FRN010P11S-4UX 210 370

*1

*1

FRN075G11S-2UX 1600 2050

FRN100G11S-2UX 2150 2500

FRN125G11S-2UX 2600 3000


*1

FRN001G11S-4UX 45 85

*1

FRN002G11S-4UX 60 110

FRN003G11S-4UX 80 150

FRN005G11S-4UX 130 230

*1

*2

*2

*1

*1

*1

*1

FRN015P11S-4UX 300 520

FRN020P11S-4UX 360 610

FRN025P11S-4UX 460 770

530 870

FRN050P11S-4UX 950 1300

1100 1550

FRN075P11S-4UX

FRN100P11S-4UX

*1

*1

*1

*1

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

FRN007G11S-4UX 170 300

FRN010G11S-4UX 230 400

FRN015G11S-4UX 300 520

FRN020G11S-4UX 360 610

FRN025G11S-4UX 460 770

FRN030G11S-4UX 550 900

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

FRN040G11S-4UX 750 1250

*1

FRN125P11S-4UX

FRN150P11S-4UX

FRN200P11S-4UX

FRN250P11S-4UX

FRN300P11S-4UX

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3

FRN050G11S-4UX 950 1650

FRN075G11S-4UX 1300 2200

FRN125G11S-4UX 1950 2800

*1

FRN060G11S-4UX 1100 1850

*1

*1

FRN100G11S-4UX 1550 2350

*2

*2

FRN150G11S-4UX 2400 3350

*2

FRN350P11S-4UX 4350 5100

FRN400P11S-4UX 5100 5900

FRN450P11S-4UX 5700 6650

FRN500P11S-4UX 6900 8050

FRN600P11S-4UX 8050 9350

FRN700P11S-4UX 8900 10400

FRN800P11S-4UX 10300 12100

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3

FRN200G11S-4UX 2650 3900

FRN250G11S-4UX 3250 4700

FRN300G11S-4UX 3900 5750

FRN350G11S-4UX 4350 6300

*2

*2

*2

*2

FRN400G11S-4UX 5450 7950

FRN450G11S-4UX 6150 8950

FRN500G11S-4UX 6700 9950

FRN600G11S-4UX 7750 11300

*2

*2

*2

*2

Note)

Lower carrier frequency : 2kHz

*1 : 15kHz, *2 : 10kHz, *3 : 6kHz

A-1

20

10-05 (K07/E10) 10CM

FRENIC-G11S/P11S Instruction Manual INR-SI47-1206b-E

Instruction Manual

High-Performance, Low-Noise Inverter

General-Purpose Industrial Machines Fans and Pumps

230V Series 230V Series

1/4HP/FRNF25G11S-2UX 7.5HP/FRN007P11S-2UX to 125HP/FRN125G11S-2UX

460V Series to 150HP/FRN150P11S-2UX

460V Series

1/2HP/FRNF50G11S-4UX 7.5HP/FRN007P11S-4UX to 600HP/FRN600G11S-4UX to 800HP/FRN800P11S-4UX

CAUTION

Instructions on use

There is a risk of accident.

Instructions on installation

There is a risk of fire.

Instructions on wiring

as fire may result.

as injury may result.

Instructions on operation

Electric shock may occur.

Accident may result.

Accident may result.

Accident may result.

Accident may result.

Electric shock may result.

Failure may result.

Burns may result.

Injury may result.

Injury may result.

Instructions on maintenance, inspection, and replacement

Electrical shock may result.

Electric shock or injury may result.

Instructions on disposal

Injury may result.

Other instructions

Electric shock or injury may result.

Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe

Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe

Table 1-1 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe

Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe

Table 1-2 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe

Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark]

CAUTION

General instructions

Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark]

Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark]

Contents

1-1 Receiving Inspections

TYPE : Inverter type

SOURCE : Power rating

OUTPUT : Output rating

MASS : Mass (not indicated for products with 30HP or less)

SER.No.

year:

1-2 Appearance

1-3 Handling the Product

(1) Removing the surface cover

For the inverter of 40HP or more, remove the six mounting screws of the surface cover, then remove the surface cover.

(2) Removing the keypad panel

After removing the surface cover as explained in (1), loosen the mounting screws of the keypad panel and remove as shown in Figure 1.3.3.

Loosen the mounting screws of the keypad panel and remove using the finger holds on the keypad panel case.

1-4 Carrying

Carry the product by the main unit.

Do not carry the product while holding the cover or parts other than the main unit.

Use a crane or hoist to carry a product equipped with hanging holes.

1-5 Storage

Temporary storage of this product must meet those conditions listed in Table 1-5-1.

Table 1-5-1 Storage environment

If the product is to be stored for an extended period after purchase, the method of storage depends primarily on storage location.

The general long-term storage method is as follows:

2-1 Operating Environment

Install this product in a location that meets those conditions listed in Table 2-1-1

Table 2-1-1 Operating environment

Table 2-1-2 Output current reduction rate

2-2 Installation Method

Fire or accident may result.

(1) Removing the ventilating covers

2-3 Connection

Remove the surface cover before connecting the terminal blocks as follows.

2-3-1 Basic connection

①